JP2017099700A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a performance by preventing the interest in a performance from decreasing.SOLUTION: Provided are a non-probability variable and time-shortening game state completed, for example, in the 100-th variation, and a probability variable and time-shortening game state. In a table for selecting a variation pattern for each game state, a selectable variation pattern is prescribed so as to be equal in any selection state of a non-probability variable and time-shortening game state and a probability variable and time-shortening game state until the 100-th variation. In the 100-th variation, a table is prescribed such that variation time of the variation pattern selected when a jackpot is not won differs between the non-probability variable and time-shortening game state and the probability variable and time-shortening game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine having a different effect that is easily executed according to the effect mode being executed at that time is disclosed (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-143552 A

  However, in the technology as described above, even if the execution frequency of the effect is changed according to the effect mode, it is easy to estimate the execution frequency of the effect from the effect mode grasped by the player. There is a problem that it is limited and the interest in the production is reduced.

  This invention is made | formed in view of the said problem, and it aims at providing the game machine which can raise the interest with respect to an effect so that the interest with respect to an effect may not be reduced.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery related to a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the identification information is changed in accordance with the lottery result, and the game is performed in response to the display result of the identification information being in a predetermined special display mode. A gaming machine with a main control means that can be controlled in a special gaming state advantageous to the
Production control means for controlling production according to the lottery result by the main control means,
As a gaming state controlled by the main control means after the end of the special gaming state, at least a first gaming state that is a gaming state included in the termination condition that the predetermined start condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times A gaming state having the same termination condition as the termination condition, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
Of the plurality of tables associated with the variation pattern capable of specifying the variation time of the identification information, the number of times the predetermined start condition is established that the table used after the end of the special gaming state is satisfied after the end of the special gaming state In units, predefined according to the execution result of the special gaming state, and
Until the predetermined number of times, the table is defined so that the variation patterns selectable by the main control means are the same in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, The number of times is defined such that the variation time of the variation pattern selected by the main control means differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state when at least the special gaming state is not won. It is characterized by that.

In the above configuration, both the first gaming state and the second gaming state are terminated when the predetermined number of start conditions is reached a predetermined number. Also, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the same variation pattern is selected until the predetermined number of times is reached, but if the special gaming state is not won in the predetermined number of times (so-called loss), A different variation pattern is selected a predetermined number of times.
In this way, in the case of losing, since different variation patterns are executed depending on the gaming state, the variation time varies depending on the variation pattern, so the gaming state controlled by the variation time depends on which gaming state Can be notified.
Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the gameability of the player, such as when the game state after the end of the special game state is different, and to increase the interest in changing time and performance.

In this game machine,
The first gaming state is a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state with a relatively low probability of transition to the special gaming state,
The second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state with a relatively high probability of transition to the special gaming state and a short-time gaming state,
The main control means ends the short-time gaming state when the predetermined number of times of establishment of the predetermined start condition reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific number of times that the predetermined number of start conditions is satisfied is greater than the predetermined number of times. When reaching the above, the high-probability gaming state is terminated.

  In the above configuration, the high-probability gaming state continues after the end of the second gaming state. For example, in the case of losing at a predetermined number of times, it becomes possible to grasp which gaming state was based on the variation time of the identification information, and it is possible to grasp whether or not it is a high probability gaming state. It is possible to improve the playability of the game, and to further enhance the interest in changing time and production.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest in the production.

It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the functional flow of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the logo unit and base door of the pachinko game machine which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the logo unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the logo unit and base door of the pachinko game machine which concern on one Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the logo unit and base door of the pachinko game machine which concern on one Embodiment of this invention from back. It is a rear view which shows the logo unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which partially enlarges and shows the logo unit and base door of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which partially enlarges and shows the logo unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which partially enlarges and shows the logo unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention from the rear. It is a front view which shows the presentation display unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the production | presentation display unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the presentation display unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the standby state of the shutter device in the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view which shows the standby state of the shutter device in the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the appearance state of the shutter apparatus in the presentation display unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the appearance state of the shutter apparatus in the production | presentation display unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which partially enlarges and shows the shutter device in the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is sectional drawing which shows a part of shutter device in the production | presentation display unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the standby state of the protrusion apparatus in the presentation display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the standby state of the protrusion apparatus in the presentation display unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the 1st protrusion apparatus contained in the protrusion apparatus of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the whole operation | movement of the 1st protrusion apparatus of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the drive mechanism contained in the 1st protrusion apparatus of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 1 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a first protruding device of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement in a part of 1st protrusion apparatus of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement in a part of 1st protrusion apparatus of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement in a part of 1st protrusion apparatus of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating typically the operation | movement in a part of 1st protrusion apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating message transmission of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot kind determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the change pattern selection table according to game state used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, as an example, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the latter half variation pattern selected in the case of V certain success. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production table and chance production table which are used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the prefetch effect table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation pattern determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high-speed pseudo | simulation in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the button hitting | ranking rank up scenario table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the rank up lottery table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interruption process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input detection process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening prize detection process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction and the probability variation subtraction process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end interval process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern table setting process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol control process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub control circuit main process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for describing a part of the processing illustrated in FIG. 61; It is a flowchart which shows the button input interruption process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the operation means input process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command transmission process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the message setting process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the directory table registration process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the message transmission process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the probable change effect control process as the effect mode determination process performed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the story & battle effect selection process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the battle effect selection process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the interface notification setting process as an effect mode determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the chance production | presentation setting process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo | simulation series effect determination process as an effect mode determination process performed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal pseudo-continuous effect setting process performed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the high-speed pseudo | simulation continuous production | presentation setting process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows V production | presentation setting process as a production | presentation aspect determination process performed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the button press effect setting process as an effect mode determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the button hitting effect setting process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the character button effect setting process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the safe mode setting process as an effect mode determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect setting process as an effect mode determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the notification effect setting process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the story production | presentation and battle presentation in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the story production | presentation and battle presentation in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the protagonist straddle effect in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the interface preview and chance production | presentation in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the interface preview in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the promotion lottery which concerns on the background color change in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation timing with the production | presentation relevant to the pseudo | simulation ream in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation which concerns on V prize in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement pattern which concerns on V prize in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the button press effect in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the safe mode regarding LED brightness | luminance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation pattern accompanying the normal reach aspect in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the story effect and battle effect in ST in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various effect patterns in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the operation | movement pattern which concerns on V winning a prize at the time of big hit, and the round pattern at the time of big hit and the small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of V effect setting processing.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Function flow]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the pachinko game is a game in which game ball payout control processing is performed when a game ball is fired by a user's operation and the game ball wins various prizes. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

  When it is a “hit” in a special symbol game or a “hit” in a normal symbol game, the probability that a game ball will win is relatively increased, and the game ball payout control process is more likely to be performed. Become.

  In addition, for various winnings, there is a special symbol start winning, which is one condition for the variable symbol display in the special symbol game, and a single condition for the variable symbol normal symbol display in the normal symbol game. Some regular symbol starting prizes are also included.

  In this specification, “variable display” is a concept that can be displayed in a variable manner. For example, “variable display” that is actually changed and “stop display” that is actually stopped and displayed. Is possible.

  Further, in the “variable display”, for example, “derivation display” in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of the special symbol game can be performed. In other words, in this specification, the operation from the start of “variable display” to “derivative display” is referred to as one “variable display”.

  Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described.

  (1) When there is a special symbol start winning in the special symbol game, random numbers (a jackpot determination random number value and a symbol determination random number value) are extracted and extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. Each random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process during the special symbol game shown in FIG. 1).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by a special symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable symbol variable display is established with one condition that the random number value is stored. judge.

  Next, when the variable symbol special display is started, the jackpot determination random number extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to and a jackpot determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot determination is made. Thereafter, stop symbol determination processing is performed. In this process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the counter for symbol determination and the result of the jackpot determination described above.

  Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the variation pattern determining counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  Next, effect pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol for the stop display described above, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. An effect pattern to be executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

  Then, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special display to be stopped, the special pattern variation pattern, and the effect pattern associated with the special symbol variable display are referred to, and the variable display control processing for controlling the special symbol variable display And the effect control process which performs a predetermined effect is performed.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not “big hit” is reached. In this determination process, if it is determined that a “hit” is reached, a big hit game control process for performing a big hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “big hit” has not been reached, the big hit game control process is not executed.

  When it is determined that the game is not “big hit”, or when the big hit game control process is completed, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this gaming state transition control process, management of the gaming state in a normal time different from the big hit gaming state is performed.

  As a normal gaming state, for example, in the jackpot determination described above, a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a “big hit” (hereinafter referred to as “probability changing gaming state”) or a special symbol start winning is likely to be obtained. A gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a “short-time gaming state”). Thereafter, the process for determining whether or not to start variable symbol special display is performed again, and thereafter, the various types of special symbol control processing described above are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a start during a special symbol change display, various data acquired at the time of the start win (a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random number, etc. ) Is put on hold.

  In other words, if a game ball wins a start during a special symbol variation display, the special symbol variable display (variation display) corresponding to the start winning is suspended, and after the currently executed special symbol variation display ends. The variable display of the special symbol that is put on hold is started. Hereinafter, the variable display of the special symbol that is on hold is also referred to as “holding ball”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. You can get a hold ball. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is not shown in FIG. 1, it determines the winning of the holding ball (whether or not “big hit” is won) based on the information of the holding ball described above, and further, the determination result A function for performing a predetermined effect based on the above, that is, a prefetch effect function may be provided.

  (2) When there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random number value is stored (the normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 1). (See processing flow).

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable symbol variable display is satisfied, with one condition that the random number value is stored. judge.

  Next, when starting normal symbol variable display, the random number value extracted from the counter for hit determination is referred to and a hit determination is made as to whether or not “win” is set. Thereafter, variation pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

  Next, referring to the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol, a variable display control process for controlling variable display of the normal symbol and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not “winning” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that “winning” is achieved, a winning game control process for performing a winning game is executed.

  In the winning game control process, the possibility of various winnings as described above, in particular, the possibility of special symbol start winning of a game ball in a special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be “winning”, the winning game control process is not executed. Thereafter, the process for determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball depends on the conditions such as whether or not the game is a “hit” in the special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not the game is the “hit” in the normal symbol game. The ease of processing changes.

  In this embodiment, as a random number extraction method, a soft random number method for generating random values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a pachinko machine includes a random number generator whose random number is updated at a predetermined period, a random number value is determined from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the random number may be adopted as the above-described method for extracting various random values.

  When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in a predetermined period by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined period.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is forward, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is backward, and the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is left. Direction, the right side when viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the right direction, the upper side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is upward, the lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is downward, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front Is a clockwise direction, and conversely, a counterclockwise direction is a counterclockwise direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main body 2, a base door 3 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 2, and a glass door that can be opened and closed with respect to the base door 3. 4.

[Main unit]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 3). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is configured by a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape that is substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is disposed in front of the main body 2 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and by rotating the base door 3 around one side edge of the main body 2, the base door 3 The opening 2a is opened and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the base door 3 is provided with a rectangular opening 3 a. The opening 3a is formed from the substantially central portion of the base door 3 to the upper region, and has a size that occupies most of the region.

  A speaker 11, a game board 12, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a payout unit 16, and a board unit 17 can be attached to the base door 3. The game board 12 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 13, and a shutter device 8 and a projecting device 9 as devices relating to a movable work for effects described later (see FIGS. 15 and 16). The liquid crystal display device 13, the shutter device 8, and the protruding device 9 are configured (integrated, combined, and installed) as an effect display unit 10 to be described later.

  The speaker 11 is disposed on the upper part (near the upper end) of the base door 3. The game board 12 is disposed in front of the base door 3 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and is disposed so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

  The game board 12 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member having light permeability. In addition, as resin which has a light transmittance, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a methacryl resin etc. can be used, for example.

  In addition, a game area 12a in which a game ball fired from the launching device 15 rolls is formed on the front surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail (specifically, an outer rail 41a (not shown) surrounding an opening 4a of a glass door 4 described later), and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially circular.

  Further, a plurality of game nails (not shown) are driven into the game area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13 a is set so as to occupy a partial area on the surface of the game board 12. The size of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 may be a size that occupies the entire area of the surface of the game board 12.

  In the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as an effect identification symbol (decoration symbol), an effect image, and an ornamental image are displayed. The player can view various images displayed on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 via the game board 12.

  In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the liquid crystal display device 13, for example, a plasma display, a rear projection display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) ) A display device such as a display may be applied.

  A spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back surface of the game board 12 (surface on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 13 (surface on the front side of the pachinko game machine 1). A space serving as a flow path of the game ball rolling in the game area 12a is formed.

  The spacer 19 is made of a light transmissive material. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the spacer 19 may be partially formed of a light-transmitting material or may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material. .

  The dish unit 14 is disposed below the game board 12. The dish unit 14 includes an upper dish 21 and a lower dish 22 disposed below the upper dish 21. The upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22 are formed with a payout port 21a and a payout port 22a for renting out game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), respectively.

  When a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout opening 21a or the payout opening 22a, and the discharged game balls are stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. Further, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are launched into the game area 12 a by the launching device 15.

  The plate unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. The effect button 23 is attached on the upper plate 21. A jog dial 24 is attached to the periphery of the effect button 23 so as to be rotatable with respect to the effect button 23.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a predetermined effect function that is performed using at least one of the effect button 23 and the jog dial 24. When performing a predetermined effect, the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is used. In addition, an image prompting the operation of at least one of the effect button 23 and the jog dial 24 is displayed.

  The launcher 15 is disposed in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launching device 15 includes a launching handle 25 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 26 that engages with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14. The firing handle 25 is disposed on the front side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a solenoid actuator for controlling the launching operation of the game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 26. Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a touch sensor is provided at the peripheral portion of the firing handle 25, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player's hand contacts the touch sensor of the launch handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. Thereby, it is detected that the player has gripped the launch handle 25, and the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator.

  When the player holds the firing handle 25 and rotates it clockwise (when viewed from the player side), the resistance of the firing volume changes according to the turning angle of the firing handle 25. The electric power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially fired, and the fired game balls are guided to the guide rail and discharged to the game area 12a of the game board 12.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a firing stop button is provided on the side of the firing handle 25. The launch stop button is a button provided to stop the launch of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. When the player presses the launch stop button, the launch of the game ball is stopped even when the launch handle 25 is gripped and rotated.

  The dispensing unit 16 and the substrate unit 17 are arranged on the back side of the base door 3. A game ball is supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on the establishment of the payout condition.

  The board unit 17 has various control boards. Various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub-control circuit 200, a payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like which will be described later (see FIG. 33 which will be described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is formed in a rectangular frame shape. The glass door 4 is disposed on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size that covers the game board 12. On the front surface of the glass door 4, a logo unit 58 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 11. Here, the logo unit 58 of this embodiment comprises the decoration unit of this invention.

  In the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening 4 a having a size that exposes at least the game area 12 a is formed in an area facing the game area 12 a of the game board 12. The opening 4a of the glass door 4 is attached with a protective glass 28 having a light transmission property, thereby closing the opening 4a.

  Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is disposed so as to face at least the game area 12 a of the game board 12. As shown in FIG. 2, electrical decoration covers 58 </ b> A to 58 </ b> C are provided at the left and right ends and the lower end of the opening 4 a of the glass door 4. LED (Light Emitting Diode) 59A-59C (refer FIG. 33) is provided in the rear surface of the electrical decoration covers 58A-58C. The LEDs 59A to 59C are controlled so as to light up or blink in conjunction with operations of a shutter device 8 and a protruding device 9, which will be described later, effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, effect buttons, light emission of the illumination covers 58A and 58B, and the like. Is done.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 12.

  On the front surface of the game board 12, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first start port 44, a second start port 45, and an ordinary electric accessory 46, Is provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, general winning holes 51 and 52, a first big winning hole 53, a second big winning hole 54, an out opening 55, and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are provided.

  Further, a bulge cover (not shown) is provided in the vicinity of the second big prize opening 54 on the front surface of the game board 12, and the bulge cover bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 12. Hereinafter, the front of the game board 12 represents the player side with respect to the game board 12, and the rear of the game board 12 represents the opposite side to the player side with respect to the game board 12. Further, the right side and the left side with respect to the game board 12 represent the right side and the left side when the game board 12 is viewed from the front. Therefore, when the game board 12 is viewed from the rear, the right side of the game board 12 is the left side and the left side of the game board 12 is the right side in the drawing.

  Further, on the front side of the game board 12, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special display are displayed at the lower right portion. A symbol hold display device 65 is provided (reference numerals are omitted in FIG. 5A and refer to FIG. 33).

  In the present embodiment, a notification LED that is turned on when the result of the special symbol stop display is “big hit”, a round number display LED that shows the number of rounds in the big hit game, and the like may be provided.

[Various components of game area]
The guide rail 41 extends in an arc shape so as to divide the game area 12a, and an outer rail 41a (not shown) surrounding the opening 4a of the glass door 4 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 5A) and the outer rail 41a And an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape.

  The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are disposed so as to face each other in the vicinity of the left end portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, and thereby, between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b, A guide path 41c for guiding the game ball launched by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

  In addition, a ball discharge port 41d is formed at the tip of the inner rail 41b located at the upper left portion of the game area 12a by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing the tip. And the ball | bowl return prevention piece 42 is provided in the front-end | tip part of the inner rail 41b so that the ball | bowl discharge port 41d may be plugged up.

  The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d into the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

  The game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part of the game area 12a toward the lower part. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game region 12a such as a plurality of game nails, the first start port 44, the second start port 45, etc., and changes the traveling direction of the upper part of the game region 12a. It flows down from the bottom to the bottom.

  A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over an area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

  The ball passage detector 43 is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the first big winning opening 53 on the right side of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passage detector 43 is provided with a passing ball sensor 43a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a passing game ball. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the normal symbol game is “winning”, and the normal symbol variation display is started based on the result of the lottery.

  The first start port 44 is disposed below the display area 13 a, and the second start port 45 is disposed below the first start port 44. The 1st starting opening 44 and the 2nd starting opening 45 are comprised by the member which can receive a game ball.

  Hereinafter, a game ball entering or passing through the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 is referred to as “winning”. When the game ball wins the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 44, a lottery for determining whether or not it is a “big hit” and a lottery for determining whether or not it is a “small hit” are performed. Based on the results of the lottery, The variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, when a game ball enters the second start opening 45, a lottery for determining whether or not the game is a “big hit” is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be referred to as special figure 1 and special figure 2, respectively.

  The first starting port 44 is provided with a first starting port winning ball sensor 44a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a winning game ball. The second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the second starting port 45. The game balls that have won the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 pass through a recovery port (not shown) provided in the game board 12 and are conveyed to a game ball recovery unit (not shown). .

  The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided at the second start opening 45. The normal electric accessory 46 is a blade-like member that opens and closes so as to be tilted forward and backward in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is an opening that allows a game ball to be awarded to the second start opening 45. It is configured to be able to switch between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the second start opening 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven to open and close by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a (see FIG. 33 described later).

  In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in a closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. Also good. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 46 is not limited to one that operates to open and close the blade-shaped member in the front-rear direction, and for example, a so-called electric motor that widens the start port by rotating in the left-right direction of the game board 1. It may be a tulip type or a tongue-like member that opens and closes the starting port by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The general winning opening 51 is arranged near the lower left part of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. Further, the general winning opening 52 is disposed on the right side of the ball passage detector 43 and is disposed near the lower right portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side.

  The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are configured by members capable of receiving game balls. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as “winning” that the game ball enters or passes through the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls are paid out.

  The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 51a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a winning game ball. In addition, the general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 52a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the general winning opening 52.

  The first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are arranged below the ball passage detector 43 and to the right of the first start opening 44 and the first start opening 45. The first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the first big prize opening 53 is arranged above the second big prize opening 54.

  Both the first grand prize winning port 53 and the second grand prize winning port 54 are so-called attacker-type opening / closing devices, and shutters 53a and 54a that can be opened and closed, and solenoid actuators (to be described later) that drive the shutters 53a and 54a. 33, a first big prize opening solenoid 53b and a second big prize opening solenoid 54b).

  Each of the first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 receives a game ball when the corresponding shutter 53a, 54a is open (open state), and the shutter is closed (closed state). At that time, the game ball is not accepted.

  In the following, it is also referred to as “winning” that a game ball enters or passes through the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54. When a game ball wins the first big prize opening 53, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins the second grand prize opening 54, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

  The first grand prize opening 53 is provided with a count sensor 53c (see FIG. 33 to be described later) for counting the winning game balls. Further, the second grand prize opening 54 is provided with a count sensor 54c (see FIG. 5A and FIG. 33 described later) for counting the winning game balls.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first grand prize opening 53 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large width dimension so that a plurality of game balls can be won simultaneously. The second large winning opening 54 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the bulging cover (not shown) as an opening having a relatively small size so that game balls can be won one by one.

  The shutter 53a corresponding to the first grand prize winning port 53 is opened and closed so as to have a forward tilting / retreating posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, thereby switching the first grand prize winning port 53 to an open state or a closed state. It is a thing and is arrange | positioned so that the 1st big winning opening 53 may be covered in a closed state. That is, the shutter 53a has a first big prize opening solenoid 53b so that the shutter 53a changes between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first big prize opening 53 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. (See FIG. 33 described later).

  The shutter 54a corresponding to the second big prize opening 54 switches the second big prize opening 54 to an open state or a closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and in the closed state, It is arranged so as to cover the winning opening 54. In other words, the shutter 54a has a second big prize opening solenoid 54b so that the shutter 54a changes between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second big prize opening 54 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. (See FIG. 33 described later).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the specific area 38A and the non-specific area through which the game ball detected by the count sensor 54c after passing through the second big prize opening 54 can be passed inside the bulge cover. 38B is provided. The ball path of the game ball from the second big prize opening 54 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the bulging cover. The game ball that has won the second grand prize opening 54 passes through one of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B, and is then led to the back of the game board 1 and collected. A count sensor 54c is disposed in the middle of the ball path from the second big prize opening 54 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. A specific area sensor 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the passage of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area sensor 380A. A non-specific area sensor 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area sensor 380B. A displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided near the specific region 38A.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to an open state or a closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 is moved by the displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 33 described later) so that the displacement is changed between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 38A and a closed state in which the passage is impossible or difficult. Driven. When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, a game ball that cannot pass through the specific area 38A passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  Hereinafter, the passing of the game ball through the specific area 38A may be referred to as “V winning”. In addition, the second big prize opening 54 provided with the specific area 38A may be referred to as “V attacker”. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state that has succeeded in the V winning is finished, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the probability changing gaming state. For this reason, the V prize may be referred to as “V certainty”. The displacement member 39 may be referred to as “V Bello”.

  In addition, as a structure for implement | achieving V prize, it is good also as a structure as shown in FIG.5 (b). That is, a ball passage for guiding a game ball downward is formed inside the second grand prize opening 54, and a specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B are adjacent to the left and right at the lower end of the ball path. Is provided. A count sensor 54c is disposed at a position entering the ball path from the second big prize opening 54. A specific area sensor 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and a V winning of a game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area sensor 380A. A non-specific area sensor 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area sensor 380B. A displacement member 39 that can be turned to the left and right is provided in the vicinity of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B in the ball passage. As for the displacement member 39, the attitude | position shown by a continuous line is an open attitude | position after a displacement, and the position shown by a virtual line is a normal closed attitude | position.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific region 38A to an open state or a closed state. When the displacing member 39 is in the open posture indicated by the solid line, the specific area 38A is opened, and the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is made easy. At this time, the displacement member 39 guides the game ball to the specific area 38A on the right side of the ball passage. As a result, the game ball guided from the second grand prize opening 54 to the ball passage becomes a V prize by passing through the specific area 38A. Further, when the displacement member 39 is in the closed posture indicated by the phantom line, the specific area 38A is in a closed state, making it impossible or difficult to win a V-winning game ball in the specific area 38A. The game ball is guided to the non-specific area 38B on the left side. Thereby, the game ball guided from the second grand prize opening 54 to the ball passage passes through the non-specific area 38B without passing through the specific area 38A. Even with such a configuration, a V prize can be realized. When the count sensor 54c detects the passing of the game ball, the prize ball is paid out. Based on the signals from the count sensor 54c, the specific area sensor 380A, and the non-specific area sensor 380B, the game ball is discharged from the second big prize opening 54. It may be determined whether or not the game ball has been discharged (whether or not the game ball remains in the second big prize opening 54).

  The out port 55 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area 12a. The out port 55 receives game balls that have not won any of the first start port 44, the second start port 45, the general winning ports 51 and 52, the first big winning port 53, and the second big winning port 54. .

  When the arrangement of the various components in the game area 12a of the present embodiment is as shown in FIG. 5A, a game ball is thrown into the right area of the game area 12a by the player (so-called right-handed ), The game ball is guided to the second start opening 45 by a game nail or the like.

  In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first start opening 44. In the present embodiment, the winner of the second start opening 45 is more likely to receive a “hit” lottery that is advantageous to the player than when the first start opening 44 is won.

  Therefore, in the so-called “short-time gaming state” in which winning to the second starting port 45 is relatively easy, the possibility of winning to the first starting port 44 (a game that is disadvantageous to the player) is achieved by making a right turn. The possibility of becoming a state) can be reduced.

  The bulging cover is provided below the first big prize opening 53, and the upper surface of the bulging cover is formed as an inclined surface. This inclined surface is inclined downwardly from the upper right to the lower left as viewed from the player side. The inclined surface guides the game ball flowing down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a to the second big prize opening 54, and the game ball rolling on the inclined surface collides with a rib or the like (not shown). Then, the speed of the game ball decreases, and it becomes easy for the game ball to win the second big winning port 54 in which the shutter 54a is in the open state.

  Moreover, as shown to Fig.5 (a), the illumination cover 58E-58H is provided in the circumference | surroundings of the display area 13a of the game board 12, and LED59e-59h (FIG. 5) is provided on the rear surface of the illumination cover 58E-58H. 33). The illumination covers 58E to 58H perform effects related to the shutter device 8 and the protruding device 9 described later by turning on or blinking the LEDs 59e to 59h.

[Logo unit]
6 to 13 show the logo unit 58. As shown in FIG. 6, the logo unit 58 is attached to a metal frame member 111 having conductivity. The frame member 111 is attached around the front side of the base door 3. Thereby, the logo unit 58 is disposed so as to protrude forward of the gaming machine 1.

  8 and 9, the logo unit 58 includes a front cover 580, a top cover 581, a plurality of side covers 582A to 582D, a base member 583, a plurality of substrate support members 584, a plurality of LED substrates 585, A plurality of light guide plates 586 are provided.

  The front cover 580 includes a front cover body 580A and a plurality of outer lenses 580B. The front cover body 580A has conductivity by being subjected to, for example, gold plating or silver plating on the surface. The plurality of outer lenses 580B illuminate a logo such as a model name one character at a time, and are provided so as to be lined up in the left-right direction along the front surface of the front cover body 580A. The outer lens 580B has translucency so as to guide light emitted from the corresponding LED substrate 585 behind through the light guide plate 586 outward. The outer lens 580B is assumed to be a nonconductive translucent member such as general plastic or glass. For example, the outer lens 580B may be applied with a translucent paint having conductivity on the surface, or translucent. It is also possible to use a conductive member having conductivity (such as conductive plastic). Further, the front cover main body 580A may be made conductive by, for example, performing aluminum vapor deposition on the surface. At that time, it is also possible to adjust the electrical conductivity (conductivity, conductivity) by adjusting the deposition amount of aluminum.

  The top cover 581 is attached to the top of the frame member 111 integrally with the front cover 580. A front cover body 580A of the front cover 580 is fixed to the upper portion of the upper cover 581 via a plurality of screws 581A. A so-called snap-fit locking cap 581B, which is difficult to re-detach, is fitted into a portion of the top cover 581 where the screw 581A is fixed. As a result, once the locking cap 581B is fitted together, it is difficult for the upper surface cover 581 to remove the locking cap 581B and perform the tightening operation of the screw 581A, and the front cover 580 cannot be substantially separated. Become integrated. Similar to the front cover body 580A, such a top cover 581 has conductivity, for example, by subjecting the surface to gold plating or silver plating. Note that the upper surface cover 581 may also be made conductive by, for example, performing aluminum vapor deposition on the surface.

  The front cover 580 and the upper cover 581 can be integrally handled as an assembly part of the logo unit 58 by mutual coupling via a locking cap 581B and a screw 581A that are difficult to be re-removed, and are connected to each other. When the stop caps 581B are fitted together, they cannot be easily separated from each other, so that it is possible to effectively prevent entry from the logo unit 58 into the interior due to fraud.

  The side covers 582A and 582B are fixed to the left end portion of the front cover 580 in a state where the front cover 580 is viewed from the front, and are disposed so as to overlap with the upper end of the electric decoration cover 58A. The side cover 582A is located above the side cover 582B and has translucency so as to guide light from the LED 59A corresponding to the electrical decoration cover 58A to the outside. The side cover 582A has non-conductivity because it is not plated in order to obtain good translucency. Similar to the front cover body 580A and the upper surface cover 581, the side cover 582B has conductivity by being subjected to, for example, gold plating or silver plating on the surface. The side covers 582C and 582D are fixed to the right end portion of the front cover 580 in a state where the front cover 580 is viewed from the front, and are disposed so as to overlap with the upper end of the electric decoration cover 58B. The side cover 582C is located above the side cover 582D and has a light-transmitting property so as to guide light from the LED 59B corresponding to the electrical decoration cover 58B to the outside. The side cover 582C has non-conductivity because it is not subjected to plating or the like in order to obtain good translucency. Similar to the front cover body 580A and the upper cover 581, the side cover 582D has conductivity, for example, by subjecting the surface to gold plating or silver plating. In FIG. 9, the side covers 582C and 582D are disassembled. The fixing structure of the side cover 582C will be described later with reference to FIGS. Such side covers 582B and 582D may be non-conductive members as a resin cover, or may be members having lower conductivity than those subjected to plating. Further, the side cover 582D may be made conductive by, for example, performing aluminum vapor deposition on the surface.

  A plurality of substrate support members 584 are attached to the base member 583. A substrate support member 584 is supported at the left and right ends of the base member 583 so as to project outward from the left and right ends of the base member 583, and the speaker holder 110A and the speaker cover 110B are disposed behind the substrate support member 584. The speaker holder 110 </ b> A is attached to the upper portion of the frame member 111 integrally with the speaker 11. The speaker 11 is held by the speaker holder 110 </ b> A so as not to directly touch the frame member 111. The speaker cover 110B has a mesh portion that covers the front of the speaker 11 and a side surface portion that contacts the speaker holder 110A, and is incorporated in the logo unit 58 so as to cover the front surface of the speaker 11 and the speaker holder 110A. The mesh portion of the speaker cover 110B does not have conductivity, while the other side surface portion has conductivity by, for example, plating the surface. Such a logo unit 58 is attached to the upper part of the frame member 111. Note that the speaker holder 110A is basically a non-conductive member. For example, a portion that comes into contact with or close to the speaker 11 is made non-conductive, and a portion that makes contact with or close to the speaker cover 110B is made conductive. You may make it have. The frame member 111 includes a nonconductive cover on the front surface and a conductive frame on the rear surface. A predetermined interval is provided between the frame member 111 and the speaker 11 by the non-conductive cover on the front side of the frame member 111 and the speaker holder 110A. Thereby, static electricity from the frame member 111 is prevented from coming to the speaker 11. Further, the mesh portions of the speaker holder 110A and the speaker cover 110B do not have conductivity, while the side portions of the speaker cover 110B in contact with the speaker holder 110A have conductivity, and the frame member 111 further includes: Although having conductivity, a non-conductive cover made of resin or plastic is disposed on the front side of the frame member 111. Therefore, all the members that are close to or in contact with the speaker 11 are non-conductive members, and this also effectively prevents static electricity from flying.

  The plurality of substrate support members 584 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the plurality of outer lenses 580B, and the bases so that the postures facing the front of the LED substrate 585 and the light guide plate 586 fixed thereto are different. The attachment angle to the member 583 is slightly different.

  A plurality of LEDs 59 are discretely provided on each of the plurality of LED substrates 585. The light guide plate 586 is disposed on the front surface of the LED substrate 585 so as to guide the light of each LED 59 to the corresponding outer lens 580B, and is fixed to the substrate support member 584 integrally with the LED substrate 585.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, a substrate support member 584 is disposed on the rear surface of the front cover body 580A, and screw fixing for directly screwing the side cover 582C onto the rear surface of the substrate support member 584 is performed. A portion 580Aa is provided. Further, a screw fixing portion 580Ab for screwing the conductive member 582E with the side cover 582C sandwiched is provided on the rear surface of the front cover body 580A. The side cover 582C is provided with a screw hole portion 582Ca corresponding to the screw fixing portion 580Aa and an insertion port 582Cb through which the tip of the screw fixing portion 580Ab can be inserted. The conductive member 582E is provided with a screw fixing portion 582Ea for screwing the frame member 111.

  In the side cover 582C, the screw hole portion 582Ca is directly fixed to the screw fixing portion 580Aa by the screw 582Cc while the tip of the screw fixing portion 580Ab is exposed to the insertion port 582Cb. The conductive member 582E is fixed to the screw fixing portion 580Ab exposed from the insertion port 582Cb with the screw 582Eb. As a result, the side cover 582C is fixed in a state of being sandwiched between the front cover body 580A or the substrate support member 584 and the conductive member 582E.

  In the state where the side cover 582C is fixed to the front cover 580 as described above, the conductive member 582E has the screw fixing portion 582Ea fixed to the frame member 111 by screws (not shown). One end of a ground wire (not shown) is connected to the screw 582Eb to which the conductive member 582E is fixed. The other end of the ground wire is connected to an appropriate part of the frame member 111. Thus, the front cover 580 is electrically connected to the frame member 111 through the conductive member 582E and the ground wire, although the right end portion of the front cover 580 overlaps the non-conductive and translucent side cover 582C. Although not particularly illustrated, the left end portion of the front cover main body 580A viewed from the front is electrically connected to the frame member 111 via the conductive member and the ground wire while fixing the side cover 582A in the same manner as the right end portion.

  As a result, the assembly part in which the front cover 580, the upper cover 581, and the side covers 582A to 582D are paired can be used as a decorative part without hindering the visibility of light and the ease of attachment to and removal from the frame member 111. It can be handled as a unit without impairing its functions. For example, mainly in the front cover 580, the charged static electricity is guided to the frame member 111 through the conductive member 582E and the ground wire, so that the static electricity is efficiently removed. Therefore, even if a player or the like touches the front cover 580, it can be prevented from being electrically uncomfortable. In addition, since static electricity is efficiently removed, static electricity can be prevented from flying to the connection unit (substrate) provided on the base member 583, the LED substrate 585, etc. Can be prevented.

  Further, the non-conductive speaker holder 110A that holds the speaker 11 has a side surface portion that abuts on the conductive speaker cover 110B, and the speaker cover 110B has a plurality of screw fixing portions screwed to the rear portion of the base member 583. . In particular, one end of a ground wire (not shown) is connected to the screw fixing portion 110C of the speaker cover 110B via a screw. The other end of the ground wire is connected to an appropriate part of the frame member 111. Thereby, even in the speaker cover 110B relatively close to the speaker 11, the charged static electricity is guided from the screw fixing portion 110C to the frame member 111 through the ground wire, and the static electricity is efficiently removed. That is, although a large number of electrical components are arranged inside the logo unit 58, static electricity is easily charged in the vicinity thereof, but such static electricity is efficiently removed not only from the conductive member 582E but also from the periphery of the speaker 11. Therefore, static electricity generated in the entire logo unit 58 can be sufficiently eliminated.

  Although not particularly illustrated, LED boards on which a plurality of LEDs 59A to 59C are mounted are also provided on the rear surfaces of the electrical decoration covers 58A to 58C, as in FIG. The electrical decoration covers 58 </ b> A to 58 </ b> C have conductivity by being subjected to, for example, aluminum vapor deposition or plating on the surface, and are attached to the metal frame member 111. Thereby, also in the electrical decoration covers 58 </ b> A to 58 </ b> C, the charged static electricity is efficiently removed by being guided to the frame member 111. Therefore, even if a player etc. touch the electrical decoration covers 58A-58C, it can be made not to feel electrically unpleasant. In addition, since static electricity is efficiently removed, static electricity can be prevented from flying on the LED boards and the like provided corresponding to the illumination covers 58A to 58C, and static electricity failure and destruction can be prevented in the electric circuit of each board. be able to.

[Direction display unit]
Next, the effect display unit 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 is a front view showing the effect display unit 10, FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing the effect display unit 10, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view showing the effect display unit 10.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the effect display unit 10 includes a liquid crystal display device 13, a shutter device 8, and a protruding device 9 in order from the rear to the front. The protruding device 9 can be disassembled into a first protruding device 9A and a second protruding device 9B, and the second protruding device 9B is disposed in front of the first protruding device 9A. As shown in FIG. 15, the effect display unit 10 is attached to the back surface of the game board 12.

  The liquid crystal display device 13 is supported on the back surface of the frame member 130 having the opening 130a. The display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is disposed so as to face the opening 130a, and is visible to the player in front through the light-transmitting game board 12.

  The shutter device 8 is provided in the innermost part on the front side of the frame member 130. The shutter device 8 is disposed so as not to overlap (a part or all of) the opening 130a in the standby state (non-operating state). In the operating state, a pair of movable units 81 to be described later open from both the left and right sides. It is comprised so that it may move toward the center of the part 130a. Thus, the shutter device 8 performs a predetermined effect operation so as to cover the effect image displayed in the display area 13a. The shutter device 8 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  The first protruding device 9A is provided between the shutter device 8 and the second protruding device 9B. The first projecting device 9A is arranged such that a plurality of projecting units 91A to 91G, which will be described later, are partially exposed from the periphery of the opening 130a in the standby state (non-operating state). The projecting units 91A to 91G are configured to project larger toward the center of the opening 130a. Thereby, 9 A of 1st protrusion apparatuses perform predetermined | prescribed effect operation | movement so that it may cover with the effect image displayed on the display area 13a. The first protruding device 9A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 23 and the like, the protruding units 91A to 91G are arranged so as to be partially exposed from the periphery of the entrance part 130a, but are arranged so that the entire protruding units 91A to 91G are not exposed at all. It may be made, or the whole may be exposed. Moreover, although exposure here means that it is not difficult to visually recognize, for example, when the decorative member included in the protruding device as the effect device has translucency or light emitting property, the decorative member If the light emission can be confirmed regardless of the position and the contents of the effect can be transmitted, it is not particularly necessary to move to the position where the decorative member is exposed. That is, as a member that performs the rendering operation, the visibility changes in such a manner that it is visually recognized in the first mode in the standby state and is viewed in the second mode different from the first mode in the operating state. That's fine. Moreover, as a mode in which the visibility changes, for example, a mode in which the protruding units 91 </ b> A to 91 </ b> G vary depending on whether they overlap with or not overlap with other members provided in front.

  The second projecting device 9B is provided between the first projecting device 9A and the game board 12. The second projecting device 9B is arranged such that a projecting member 96 described later is partially exposed from the lower end of the opening 130a in the standby state (non-operating state). In the operating state, the projecting member 96 is an opening. It is comprised so that it may move up largely toward the center of 130a. Thereby, the 2nd protrusion apparatus 9B performs predetermined | prescribed effect operation so that it may cover with the effect image displayed on the display area 13a. The second projecting device 9B may move when the projecting member 96 is partially exposed from the lower end of the entrance 130a in the standby state, or when the entire projecting member 96 is not exposed in the standby state. Thus, the whole may be completely exposed. Although exposure here also means that it is not difficult to visually recognize, for example, in the standby state, the protruding member 96 is visually recognized in the first mode, and in the operating state, the protruding member 96 is in a second mode different from the first mode. May be visually recognized. Further, the visibility of the protruding member 96 may be changed depending on whether the protruding member 96 overlaps or does not overlap with another member provided in front.

[Liquid Crystal Display]
The liquid crystal display device 13 is composed of liquid crystal, and displays various effects in the display area 13a.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, an effect image related to (corresponding to) a special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 described later is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61, except for specific cases, for example, a plurality of effect identification symbols (decorations) composed of numbers 1 to 8, various characters, etc. (Design) is variably displayed in the display area 13a.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

  Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is “big hit”), the player can grasp that it is “big hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a.

  As an effect for causing the player to grasp that it is a “hit”, for example, first, a plurality of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction) After that, there is an effect of displaying an image for informing the “big hit”.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the effect image relevant to the display content of the 1st special symbol reservation display apparatus 64 mentioned later and the 2nd special symbol reservation display apparatus 65 is displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. FIG. For example, the display area 13a displays hold information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the number of holdings) for notifying the number of holdings for variable display of special symbols. In addition, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a pre-reading effect is performed based on the information on the reserved ball of the special symbol, and a notice of notification at this time is also displayed in the display area 13a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a normal symbol stopped and displayed on a normal symbol display device 62 to be described later is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp the information is displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. You may provide further the function displayed on.

[Shutter device]
Next, the shutter device 8 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The shutter device 8 includes a plurality of base members 80A to 80C, a pair of left and right movable units 81A and 81B, and drive units 82A and 82B for driving the movable units 81A and 81B, respectively.

  The plurality of base members 80A to 80C are independent, the base member 80A is fixed to the lower left side of the frame member 130, the base member 80B is fixed to the lower right side of the frame member 130, and the base member 80C is It is fixed to the upper part of the frame member 130. Between the base member 80A and the base member 80B, a space having a predetermined interval in which a protruding member 96 of a second protruding device 9B described later can be disposed is provided.

  The base member 80A is provided with a guide hole 800A for moving and guiding a part of the left movable unit 81A in the left-right direction. The base member 80B guides a part of the right movable unit 81B to move in the left-right direction. A guide hole 800B is provided. The guide hole 800A is formed so that the height thereof is lowered by a predetermined dimension as it proceeds from the left end portion to the right end portion, and is inclined downward from the middle portion to the right end portion. The guide hole 800B has a symmetrical shape with the guide hole 800A and is formed such that the height decreases by a predetermined dimension as it proceeds from the right end to the left end, and descends from the middle to the left end. Inclined. Each of the base members 80A and 80B is provided with a guide groove 801 for allowing the movable units 81A and 81B to be moved in the left-right direction while entirely supporting the movable units 81A and 81B.

  Drive units 82A and 82B are incorporated in the base member 80C. Further, a guide hole 800Ca for moving and guiding a part of the left movable unit 81A in the left-right direction is provided at the lower left portion of the base member 80C so as to face the guide hole 800A, and at the lower right portion of the base member 80C. The guide hole 800Cb for moving and guiding a part of the right movable unit 81B in the left-right direction is provided so as to face the guide hole 800B. These guide holes 800Ca and 800Cb are formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with the guide holes 800A and 800B. That is, the guide hole 800Ca is formed such that the height thereof is increased by a predetermined dimension as it proceeds from the left end portion to the right end portion, and is generally inclined upward from the middle portion to the right end portion. The guide hole 800Cb is formed such that the height thereof is increased by a predetermined dimension as it proceeds from the right end portion to the left end portion, and is generally inclined upward from the middle portion to the left end portion. In addition, guide grooves 802 are provided on both the left and right sides of the lower portion of the base member 8C so as to be movable in the left-right direction while supporting each of the movable units 81A, 81B as a whole.

  The pair of left and right movable units 81A and 81B are provided so as to be symmetrical with each other. The left movable unit 81A includes a slide member 810 that is movable only in the left-right direction, an arch member 811 that is supported on the front surface of the slide member 810 and is disposed on the upper side, and that can rotate a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. An arch member 812 that is disposed on the lower side of the arch member 811 while being supported on the front surface of the member 810 and is rotatable by a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction, and an arch member 811 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the slide member 810. , 812 connected to each of the first link members 813, 814, and second link members 815, 816 connected to each of the first link members 813, 814 while being held on the rear surface of the slide member 810 so as to be vertically movable. And is configured. The right movable unit 81B is configured to have the same components as the left movable unit 81A, except that the right movable unit 81B has a symmetrical shape or an opposite operation with respect to the left movable unit 81A. These similar components are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and will be described as being related to the left movable unit 81A unless otherwise specified.

  The slide member 810 is decorated on the front surface, and is supported so that both upper and lower ends can move in the left-right direction along the guide grooves 801 and 802.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the upper arch member 811 includes a substrate base member 8110, an electrical decoration substrate 8111, a lens cover 8112, and a decorative cover 8113. The lower arch member 812 is paired with the upper arch member 811 and has the same configuration member as the upper arch member 811 except that the arch member 811 has a vertically symmetric shape and a reverse operation. It is configured. About the structural member of the lower arch member 812, the same code | symbol as the structural member of the upper arch member 811 is attached | subjected, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The substrate base member 8110 is rotatably supported at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the slide member 810. The illumination board 8111 has an LED 59D that can be turned on or blinked in conjunction with the movement of the entire shutter device 8, and is fixed to the front surface of the board base member 8110. The surface of the electrical decoration substrate 8111 is formed so as to function as a reflective surface by applying a reflective material having excellent reflection efficiency or by surface processing. The lens cover 8112 has a plurality of translucent portions 8112a that guide light from the LED 59D behind to the outside, and is attached to the decorative cover 8113 integrally. The translucent part 8112a of the lens cover 8112 is formed so as to form a projecting convex part toward the front side, and at least the translucent part 8112a is translucent so as to guide light outward. Have Thereby, the translucent part 8112a functions as a translucent surface. The decorative cover 8113 is decorated on the front surface, has a plurality of openings 8113a that expose the light transmitting portion 8112a of the lens cover 8112 to the outside, and covers the electrical decoration substrate 8111 integrally with the lens cover 8112. Are attached to the substrate base member 8110. At least the back surface of the decorative cover 8113 is formed so as to function as a reflective surface by, for example, application of a reflective material excellent in irregular reflection or surface processing. The entire lens cover 8112 may be translucent, and only a part of the lens cover 8112 may be exposed to the opening 8113a of the decorative cover 8113. In addition, the back surface of the decorative cover 8113 does not have to be excellent in light reflectivity as long as it has at least light shielding properties.

  As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 22, the plurality of LEDs 59 </ b> D on the electric decoration substrate 8111 are arranged at positions that do not face the light transmitting portion 8112 a of the lens cover 8112 and the opening portion 8113 a of the decorative cover 8113. That is, most of the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 59D is diffusely reflected on the back surface of the decorative cover 8113, travels to the surface of the electric decoration board 8111, and further reflects on the surface of the electric decoration board 8111, and then passes through the light transmitting portion 8112a. Emanates outward. As a result, the LED 59D having relatively high brightness is located at a position facing the back surface of the decorative cover 8113, so that the visibility of the LED 59D can be reduced without being directly visually recognized from the outside via the light transmitting portion 8112a. Therefore, the light emission spots due to the LEDs 59D can be made inconspicuous. As a result, the visual effect due to the light effect of the LED 59D can be improved together with the dynamic effect of the shutter device 8. Note that “exit” includes implications such as light output and straight travel. In addition, “light emission spots” refer to light emitting parts as light emitting parts, and the vicinity of the light emitting parts through light-transmitting members (lens members, light diffusion sheets, light transmitting sheets, etc.) provided to cover the light sources. When visually recognized, it means that the brightness near the light emitting portion is relatively high and the shading becomes more conspicuous. For example, when the light emitting part has a circular shape, the luminance of the central part is most likely to be the highest, and depending on the degree of light diffusion, light emission spots occur when the directivity of light emitted from a light source such as an LED is strong. Cheap. The light-emitting part that is visible like a high-luminance spot or a spot is different in brightness, color, visibility, etc. from the surrounding low-brightness part (difference occurs, is emphasized, etc.). There is a need not to generate a light emitting group by emitting light uniformly. Thereby, in this embodiment, the light emitting part is difficult to visually recognize, or the visibility thereof is reduced, or the light emitting part is not conspicuous.

  Both the upper arch member 811 and the lower arch member 812 are rotatable about a fulcrum S set at the center of the slide member 810. That is, the arch member 812 is rotatably supported by the front center portion of the slide member 810 below the arch member 811 and is configured to be interlocked with the operation of the arch member 811. Such an arch member 812 also emits light by a plurality of LEDs 59D disposed therein. As a result, the lower arch member 812 emits light while interlocking with the upper arch member 811 to improve the effect.

  The first link member 813 is configured by a member bent in a substantially L shape, and has an intermediate portion 8130 that is rotatably supported on the back surface of the slide member 810 in the vicinity of the upper arch member 811. A pin 811 </ b> A provided in a suitable portion on the back surface of the arch member 811 that is a predetermined distance from the fulcrum S is loosely fitted to the lower end of the first link member 813. The pin 811A is inserted through a long hole 810A provided in the slide member 810. The upper end of the first link member 813 is disposed so as to be closer to the center side of the opening portion 130 than the intermediate portion 8130, and a pin 815A provided at the lower end of the second link member 815 is rotatable at the upper end. Connected to

  The second link member 815 is formed of a strip-shaped member, and is held on the back surface of the slide member 810 so as to be vertically movable along a substantially vertical direction. The lower end of the second link member 815 is connected to the upper end of the first link member 813 via a pin 815A. A pin 815B is provided at the upper end of the second link member 815, and this pin 815B is loosely fitted in the guide hole 800Ca of the base member 80C.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in a state where the left slide member 810 is located on the left side as the standby position, the upper end of the second link member 815 is in a state along the left end portion where the guide hole 800Ca is at a lower position. Accordingly, the lower end of the first link member 813 is in a state where the pin 811A is moved to the leftmost side. As a result, the arch member 811 integrated with the pin 811A is positioned outside the left end of the opening 130 together with the slide member 810, and is hidden in a generally upright posture without overlapping the display region 13a.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the slide member 810 on the left side moves to the right and the slide member 810 is positioned closer to the center of the opening 130, the upper end of the second link member 815 Is in a state along the right end portion of the guide hole 800Ca which is higher, and accordingly, the lower end of the first link member 813 is in a state in which the pin 811A is moved to the right side. Accordingly, the arch member 811 integrated with the pin 811A is positioned near the center of the opening 130 together with the slide member 810, but is largely inclined from the standing position, and overlaps with a part of the display area 13a. The state that appeared while.

  The lower first link member 814 and the second link member 816 are also similar to the upper first link member 813 and the second link member 815 except that the operation is vertically symmetrical, and is configured as follows. Yes.

  The first link member 814 is configured by a member bent in a substantially L shape, and has an intermediate portion 8140 that is rotatably supported on the back surface of the slide member 810 that is in the vicinity of the lower arch member 812. A pin 812 </ b> A provided in an appropriate portion on the back surface of the arch member 812 that is a predetermined distance from the fulcrum S is loosely fitted to the upper end of the first link member 814. The pin 812A is inserted through a long hole (not shown) provided in the slide member 810. The vicinity of the arch member 812 provided with the pin 812A is biased by one end (not shown) of the coil spring 817 so as to be elastically movable toward the center of the opening 130 (FIG. 18). (See the enlarged circle.) The lower end of the first link member 814 is disposed so as to be closer to the center side of the opening portion 130 than the intermediate portion 8140, and a pin 816A provided at the upper end of the second link member 816 is rotatable at the lower end. Connected to

  The second link member 816 is formed of a strip-shaped member, and is held on the back surface of the slide member 810 so as to be movable up and down substantially along the vertical direction. The upper end of the second link member 816 is connected to the lower end of the first link member 814 via a pin 816A. A pin 816B is provided at the lower end of the second link member 816, and this pin 816B is loosely fitted in the guide hole 800A of the base member 80A.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in a state where the left slide member 810 is located on the left side as the standby position, the lower end of the second link member 816 is in a state along the left end portion where the guide hole 800A is at a high position. Accordingly, the upper end of the first link member 814 is in a state where the pin 812A is moved to the leftmost side. As a result, the arch member 812 integrated with the pin 812A is positioned outside the left end of the opening 130 together with the slide member 810, and is hidden in a generally upright posture without overlapping the display region 13a.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the slide member 810 on the left side moves to the right and the slide member 810 is positioned closer to the center of the opening 130, the lower end of the second link member 816 is moved. Is in a state along the right end portion which is the lower position of the guide hole 800A, and accordingly, the upper end of the first link member 814 is in a state where the pin 812A is brought to the right side. As a result, the arch member 812 integrated with the pin 812A is positioned closer to the center of the opening 130 together with the slide member 810, but is largely inclined from the standing position, and overlaps with a part of the display area 13a. The state that appeared while. At this time, the arch member 812 rotates upward against gravity, but is smoothly rotated by the biasing force of the coil spring 817.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the right movable unit 81 </ b> B is configured in the same manner as the left movable unit 81 </ b> A, and therefore performs a symmetrical operation with the left movable unit 81 </ b> A. That is, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the slide member 810 of the right movable unit 81B is located on the right side as the standby position, the arch members 811 and 812 of the movable unit 81B open together with the slide member 810. It is located outside the right end of the portion 130 and is hidden in a generally upright posture without overlapping the display area 13a.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the slide member 810 of the right movable unit 81B moves to the left and the slide member 810 is positioned closer to the center of the opening 130, the movable unit 81B While the arch members 811 and 812 are located near the center of the opening 130 together with the slide member 810, the arch members 811 and 812 are substantially inclined from the standing posture and appear to overlap with a part of the display area 13a. At this time, the tips of the right arch members 811 and 812 rotate to a position where they contact or almost contact the tips of the left arch members 811 and 812. That is, in the front of the display area 13a, an effect is formed in which the arch members 811 and 812 on both the left and right sides rotate while moving toward the center, thereby forming a combined shape.

  The drive unit 82A is disposed on the left side of the base member 80C to drive the left movable unit 81A, and the drive unit 82B is disposed on the right side of the base member 80C to drive the right movable unit 81B. Yes. The drive units 82A and 82B include a rack gear 820 fixed to the upper end of the slide member 810, a pinion gear 821 meshing with the rack gear 820, and a plurality of gears for reducing the rotational speed while transmitting the driving force by meshing with the pinion gear 821. The reduction gear 822 and the effect drive motors 60A and 60B that mesh with the one reduction gear 822 to generate a driving force are configured. Further, effect sensors 210A and 210B capable of optically detecting a part of the rack gear 820 are disposed on the base member 80C.

  For example, when focusing on the left drive unit 82A, the drive motor for production 60A operates in a predetermined rotation direction in the state shown in FIG. 17, and the left pinion gear 821 rotates counterclockwise via the plurality of reduction gears 822. Is rotated to the right, the left rack gear 820 is moved in the right direction. Thereby, the left slide member 810 is moved rightward together with the left arch members 811 and 812, and finally moved to the position shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the pinion gear 821 rotates in the clockwise direction in the state shown in FIG. 19, the left rack gear 820 is moved to the left, and the left slide member 810 is again moved together with the left arch members 811 and 812. It is moved to the standby position shown in FIG. At this time, when a part of the left rack gear 820 is detected by the effect sensor 210A, it can be recognized that the left slide member 810 has reached the standby position.

  On the other hand, when attention is paid to the right drive unit 82B, the right drive unit 82B also operates in the same manner as the left drive unit 82A and interlocks. That is, when the left drive unit 82A operates in the state shown in FIG. 17, the right effect drive motor 60B operates in a predetermined rotation direction, and the right pinion gear 821 rotates clockwise via the plurality of reduction gears 822. Rotating in the direction, the right rack gear 820 is moved in the right direction. As a result, the right slide member 810 is moved to the left together with the right arch members 811 and 812, and finally moved to the position shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the right pinion gear 821 rotates counterclockwise in the state shown in FIG. 19, the right rack gear 820 is moved rightward, and the right slide member 810 includes the right arch member 811, Together with 812, it is moved again to the standby position shown in FIG. At this time, when a part of the right rack gear 820 is detected by the effect sensor 210B, it is possible to recognize that the right slide member 810 has reached the standby position.

  According to such a pair of left and right movable units 81A, 81B, when the slide member 810 moves in the left-right direction, the second link members 815, 816 are moved in the left-right direction along the guide holes 800A, 800A, 800Ca, 800Cb. While moving, it is displaced in the vertical direction, and accordingly, the first link members 813 and 814 rotate around the intermediate portions 8130 and 8140 as fulcrums. As a result, the arch members 811 and 812 rotate around the fulcrum S via the first link members 813 and 814 while moving in the left-right direction together with the slide member 810. In other words, since the arch members 811 and 812 move simultaneously in the direction of rotation while moving in the left-right direction, the shape can be formed so as to be combined by complicated movement along a plurality of directions. The dynamic production effect is enhanced.

[Projecting device]
Next, the protruding device 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the protruding device 9 includes the first protruding device 9A and the second protruding device 9B.

<First protruding device>
The first protruding device 9A assists the operation of the base member 90, the plurality of protruding units 91A to 91G, the pair of left and right link mechanisms 92A and 92B for operating the protruding units 91A to 91G, and the protruding unit 91D. And the production drive motors 60C and 60D for driving the link mechanisms 92A and 92B, respectively.

  The base member 90 is a substantially C-shaped plate-like member when viewed from the front, and an opening is disposed below. Base members 80A and 80B of the shutter device 8 and the second projecting device 9B are disposed at positions corresponding to the openings. The base member 90 is fixed to the back surface of the frame member 130 with an interval in which the shutter device 8 and the like can be disposed between the base member 90 and the frame member 130. The base member 90 supports the plurality of projecting units 91A to 91G around the opening 130a and moves and guides the projecting units 91A to 91G in the direction from the outside to the inside of the opening 130a and vice versa. The guide hole 900 is provided. A first joint J1 (described later) of the link mechanisms 92A and 92B is movably connected to the guide hole 900, and the projecting units 91A to 91G are indirectly connected to the guide hole 900 via the first joint J1. It is supported by.

  Each of the plurality of projecting units 91 </ b> A to 91 </ b> G is basically configured by the same member, and includes a base member 910 and a decorative cover member 911 that covers the base member 910. The cover member 911 is not shown in the drawings after FIG.

  The base member 910 is provided so as to be variable inward and outward around the opening 130a while being integrated with the cover member 911. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the base member 910 is disposed at an inner side around the opening 130a and a long hole 910A having a shape corresponding to the guide hole 900 and extending along the same direction as the guide hole 900. And a leading end portion 910B. A first joint J1 (described later) of the link mechanisms 92A and 92B is movably connected to the long hole 910A. A second joint portion J2 (described later) of the link mechanisms 92A and 92B is rotatably connected to the distal end portion 910B.

  The pair of left and right link mechanisms 92A and 92B use the driving force of the effect drive motors 60C and 60D disposed on the left and right sides of the base member 90 to cause the left projecting units 91A to 91C, the right projecting units 91E to 91G, This is for efficiently transmitting to the upper protruding unit 91D. The left link mechanism 92A is provided so as to mainly transmit driving force to the left projecting units 91A to 91C and the uppermost projecting unit 91D, and the right link mechanism 92B is mainly composed of the right projecting units 91E to 91G and the uppermost projecting unit. It is provided to transmit the driving force to the protruding unit 91D. That is, the link mechanisms 92A and 92B are both connected to the projecting unit 91D, and are arranged in a substantially C shape in front view. Note that the left and right link mechanisms 92A and 92B are configured to have the same constituent members except that they have a bilaterally symmetrical structure and an opposite operation. The same constituent members are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and in the following description, those related to the left link mechanism 92A will be described unless otherwise specified.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the link mechanism 92A includes a drive gear 920 that rotates in accordance with the operation of the effect drive motor 60C, and a swing gear 921 that swings in a predetermined direction by meshing with the drive gear 920. A swinging arm 922 that has a protruding portion of the swinging gear 921 connected to the elongated hole in the distal end portion thereof so that it can be guided, and a base end portion of which is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 90. A connecting member 923 that is pivotally supported by a long hole via a pin, and an outer end and an inner end with respect to the opening 130a are rotatably connected to each other as a first joint portion J1 and a second joint portion J2. A plurality of arm members 924 </ b> A to 924 </ b> F that are connected to each other so that the crossing angle can be changed are configured as a third joint portion J <b> 3. The base member 90 is provided with effect sensors 210C and 210D capable of optically detecting a part of the swing arms 922 on both the left and right sides. By detecting a part of the swing arm 922 by these effect sensors 210C and 210D, it is recognized that the projecting units 91A to 91G are in a standby state together with the link mechanisms 92A and 92B.

  The connecting member 923 is movably engaged with the elongated hole 910 </ b> A of the base member 910. The first joint J1 is rotatably connected to the connecting member 923. The first joint J1 on the connecting member 923 is connected to the outer tip of the arm member 924A and the arm with respect to the connecting member 923. The outer front end portion of the member 924C is rotatably connected. The other first joint portion J1 is movably engaged with the elongated hole 910A of the base member 910, and the outer joint tips of the other arm members 924B, 924D, 924E, and 924F are connected to the first joint portion J1. The parts are connected so as to be rotatable. The second joint portion J2 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the base member 910, and the inner end portions of the arm members 924A to 924F are rotatably connected to the second joint portion J2.

  Next, the operation of the link mechanism 92A will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in a state where the swing arm 922 is shown by a solid line, the drive gear 920 rotates in the clockwise direction in response to the operation of the effect drive motor 60C, and the swing gear 921 is counterclockwise accordingly. When it rotates by a predetermined angle in the direction of rotation, the protrusion of the swing gear 921 swings the tip of the swing arm 922 toward the inside of the opening 130a along the long hole of the swing arm 922. Accordingly, the connecting member 923 connected to the elongated hole of the swing arm 922 via the pin slides a predetermined distance toward the inside of the opening 130a.

  At this time, the first joint portion J1 also slides a predetermined distance inward of the opening portion 130a according to the connecting member 923. Then, the two arm members 924A and 924C having the outer tip connected to the first joint J1 tend to move to the inside of the opening 130a as a whole. On the other hand, since the two arm members 924A and 924C are spaced apart from each other as the second joint portion J2 serving as the inner tip portion moves inward, the two arm members 924A and 924C are disposed at the intermediate portion serving as the third joint portion J3. A crossing angle with the other connected arm members 924B and 924D is greatly increased.

  That is, when attention is paid to the first joint portion J1 and the second joint portion J2 respectively corresponding to the protruding units 91A to 91D, the first joint portion J1 is displaced relatively outward along the elongated hole 910A of the base member 910. At the same time, the second joint portion J2 is integrated with the base member 910 and displaced to the inside of the opening portion 130a, and the distance between the first joint portion J1 and the second joint portion J2 is increased. As a result, as shown by the phantom line in FIG. 26, the link mechanism 92A has a deformed posture that pushes the protruding units 91A to 91D into the opening 130a, and the protruding units 91A to 91D are arranged around the opening 130a. From the standby state to the state of appearing in front of the display area 13a.

  When returning from the state in which the protruding units 91 </ b> A to 91 </ b> D appear to wait, the link mechanism 92 </ b> A is operated in the opposite direction to the operation described above. Further, the right link mechanism 92B is simultaneously operated in the same manner as the left link mechanism 92A. Thereby, it will be in the state in which all the protrusion units 91A-91G appeared simultaneously, and the standby state.

  Here, in particular, the uppermost protruding unit 91D moves downward from the standby position to the appearance position by the cooperation of the left and right link mechanisms 92A and 92B, while moving upward when returning from the appearance position to the standby position. Will be. On the other hand, the uppermost projecting unit 91D is located farthest from the production drive motors 60C and 60D as the drive source, and the left and right arm members 924E and 924F may be simultaneously deformed and interlocked. It is also conceivable that the protruding unit 91D does not operate smoothly. For this reason, an operation assisting mechanism 93 described below is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the motion assist mechanism 93 is incorporated in the vicinity of the protruding unit 91 </ b> D on the back surface of the base member 90, and includes a substantially U-shaped swing member 930 and a swing member. The torsion spring 931 for applying a biasing force to the 930 and a protruding pin 932 fixed to the back surface of the base member 910 are configured. Note that FIG. 29 shows a standby state, FIG. 30 shows a state during operation, and FIG. 31 shows a state at the time of appearance of the operation assisting mechanism 93. A space is formed in the base member 90 so that the swinging member 930 can swing while allowing the protruding pin 932 to contact the swinging member 930.

  In the swing member 930, a bent intermediate portion 930A is rotatably supported on the back surface of the base member 90. In the swinging member 930, the distal end portion 931A of the torsion spring 931 is rotatably wound around the distal end portion 930B located on the upper side in the standby state of FIG. The swing member 930 is formed with a recess 930 </ b> C through which the protruding pin 932 can enter and exit. The main body of the torsion spring 931 is a coil spring, and the urging force increases in the direction of separating the tip portion 931A and the base end portion 931B from each other as the distance between the tip end portion 931A and the base end portion 931B decreases. A base end portion 931 </ b> B of the torsion spring 931 is rotatably wound around a support portion 931 </ b> C on the back surface of the base member 90. Such a torsion spring 931 has a posture in which a relatively small urging force can be generated even if little or no urging force is generated in the standby state of FIG. 29 or the state of appearance of FIG. On the other hand, in the state in the middle of the operation of FIG. 30, the torsion spring 931 has a posture capable of applying a relatively large urging force. The protruding pin 932 enters and contacts the recess 930 </ b> C of the swing member 930 in the standby state of FIG. 29 and the state in the middle of the operation of FIG. 30. On the other hand, in the state at the time of appearance of FIG. 31, the protruding pin 932 is completely out of the recess 930 </ b> C of the swing member 930.

  Next, the operation of the operation assisting mechanism 93 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 (A) to (D). First, as shown in FIG. 32A, when in the standby state, the swinging member 930 is in a state where the tip end portion 930B is positioned at the highest position, and the protruding pin 932 together with the base member 910 (not shown) It is located above and is in a state where it enters the recess 930 </ b> C of the swing member 930.

  At this time, the torsion spring 931 applies a force (biasing force) that elastically biases the tip end portion 931 </ b> B of the swinging member 930 from the tip end portion 931 </ b> A. It does not act in the direction of rotating at least downward with respect to the rotation radius d connecting the intermediate portion 930A and the tip portion 930B. Thereby, although the urging force of the torsion spring 931 acts relatively weakly, the swinging member 930 is maintained in a state where the distal end portion 930B is positioned at the highest position unless the projecting pin 932 moves downward together with the base member 910. The

  Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), when the protruding pin 932 starts to move downward together with the base member 910, the swinging member 930 has its distal end pushed by the inner wall of the recess 930C pushed downward by the protruding pin 932. The portion 930B swings downward.

  At this time, since the distal end portion 930B of the swinging member 930 approaches the support portion 931C, the distance between the distal end portion 931A and the base end portion 931B of the torsion spring 931 gradually decreases, and the distal end portion 931A The urging force of the swing member 930 against the tip 930B is increased. On the other hand, even if the urging force increases in this way, it does not act in the direction in which the swinging member 930 is rotated downward until the direction in which the urging force acts is substantially parallel to the rotation radius d. As a result, the swinging member 930 does not apply a downward force to the projecting pin 932 until the biasing force of the torsion spring 931 gradually acts, but until the posture is inclined to some extent.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), when the protruding pin 932 moves downward together with the base member 910, the swinging member 930 pushes the inner wall of the recess 930C further downward by the protruding pin 932, so that the tip portion 930B swings further downward.

  Also at this time, since the distal end portion 930B of the swing member 930 is relatively close to the support portion 931C, the distal end portion 931A and the proximal end portion 931B of the torsion spring 931 have a relatively small distance from each other. It has become. As a result, a sufficient urging force acts on the tip portion 930 </ b> B of the swing member 930 from the tip portion 931 </ b> A of the torsion spring 931. The biasing force acts in a direction in which the acting direction rotates downward with respect to the rotation radius d. As a result, the swing member 930 swings downward according to the protruding pin 932 up to the middle position shown in FIG. 32B, but if the swing member 930 swings to the position shown in FIG. On the contrary, a force that pushes downward is applied to the protruding pin 932 that contacts the inner wall of the recess 930C. As a result, the protruding unit 91D is smoothly lowered and moved not only by the force moved by the left and right arm members 924E and 924F but also by the force acting by the motion assisting mechanism 93 using the swing member 930 and the torsion spring 931. It is done.

  Finally, as shown in FIG. 32D, when the protruding pin 932 moves to the lowest position together with the base member 910, the protruding pin 932 comes out of the recess 930C, and the swinging member 930 The part 930 </ b> B is in the lowest position. At this time, the torsion spring 931 takes a natural posture with little urging force. Accordingly, the distance from the distal end portion 930B to the support portion 931C of the swinging member 930 is approximately the same as the separation distance between the distal end portion 931A and the proximal end portion 931B when the torsion spring 931 takes a natural posture. It is regulated not to expand more. As a result, the swinging member 930 is maintained in a posture in which the concave portion 930C is substantially directed downward, and the protruding unit 91D is maintained in a state of being lowered to the lowest position.

  When the protruding units 91A to 91D are lowered to the lowest position and appear to rise to the highest position as the standby position and return to the standby state, the procedure reverse to the above-described operation is performed. Accordingly, the operation assisting mechanism 93 operates. Thus, the protrusion unit 91D is smoothly operated not only during the downward movement but also during the upward movement, via the acting force of the operation assisting mechanism 93 using the swing member 930 and the torsion spring 931. Further, the urging force of the torsion spring 931 may not be zero in the state of FIG. 32D but may be a state in which a urging force smaller than the state of FIG. Specifically, the magnitude of the urging force of the torsion spring 931 can be expressed by using the reference numerals in FIGS. 32A to 32D and (D) <(C) ≦ (A) ≦ (B). It may be changed as follows. Further, it is not limited to the change in the magnitude of the urging force as described above, and in the state shown in FIG. 32D, the torsion spring with respect to the distal end portion 930B that is displaced downward by swinging relatively large. The urging force 931 may act as a force that tries to stay at the position shown in FIG. That is, when the swinging member 930 is rotated to a predetermined position by rotating in a predetermined direction and the predetermined position is exceeded, the urging force of the torsion spring 931 acts in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. May be.

  According to such an operation assisting mechanism 93, the torsion spring 931 changes its posture with its base end 931B as a fulcrum during the downward movement of the protruding unit 91D from the highest position to the lowest position. The portion 931 </ b> A can be applied to the swinging member 930 by switching from upward to downward biasing force. The swing member 930 can transmit the urging force from the torsion spring 931 to the projecting pin 932 while swinging by interlocking with the projecting unit 91D via the projecting pin 932.

  That is, when the protrusion unit 91D moves downward, a downward biasing force is applied from the middle by the swinging member 930, and also when the protrusion unit 91D moves upward from the lowest position to the highest position, Since switching is applied to the urging force, smooth movement along the vertical direction can be realized without using a separate weight as in the conventional case. Thereby, several protrusion unit 91A-91G containing protrusion unit 91D can be made to appear simultaneously without trouble, and the dynamic effect by 9 A of 1st protrusion apparatuses can be heightened.

<Second projecting device>
The second protruding device 9B will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The second projecting device 9B includes a base member 95, a projecting member 96, a swing arm 97 for moving the projecting member 96 in the vertical direction, and an effect drive motor 60E for driving the swing arm 97. Configured. Although not shown in FIG. 23, an effect sensor 210E capable of optically detecting a part of a member that drives the swing arm 97 is disposed (see FIG. 33).

  The base member 95 is disposed below the opening 130a. The protruding member 96 is supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction along a guide groove provided in the base member 95. Since the protruding member 96 is positioned below the opening 130a in the standby state, the protruding member 96 is hidden without substantially overlapping the display region 13a. At this time, when a part of the member that drives the swing arm 97 is detected by the effect sensor 210E, it is recognized that the protruding member 96 is in a standby state. On the other hand, when the production drive motor 60E operates in a predetermined rotation direction, the swing arm 97 is swung upward. As a result, the protruding member 96 rises to the center of the opening 130a and appears in front of the display area 13a. When returning from the state in which the protruding member 96 appears to the standby state, the swing arm 97 is operated in the direction opposite to the above-described operation. The protruding member 96 includes a light-transmitting cover, and an electric decoration board on which LEDs 59E (see FIG. 33) are mounted is provided.

  Such a projecting member 96 of the second projecting device 9B appears at the same time as the movable units 81A and 81B of the shutter device 8, the projecting units 91A to 91G of the first projecting device 9A, or appears alone. Such a second projecting device 9B can also enhance the dynamic effect.

[Special symbol display device]
The special symbol display device 61 is disposed in the lower right part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays special symbols (variable display and stop display) in a special symbol game. In the present embodiment, the special symbol display device 61 is configured by a 7-segment display that displays special symbols as symbols composed of numbers, symbols, and the like.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may comprise the special symbol display apparatus 61 by several LED, for example. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the special symbol (identification information) when the game ball has won the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 (special symbol starting winning). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs the special symbol stop display after performing the variable symbol special symbol display for a predetermined time.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 is referred to as a first special symbol. The special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (“big hit” mode), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to the big hit gaming state which is a state.

  That is, in the special symbol display device 61, it is “big hit” that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the first big winning port 53 or the second big winning port 54 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61, the first big winning opening 53 becomes an open state.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61, the second big winning port 54 is opened.

  The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or until a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And if the elapsed period of the open state of each big prize opening satisfy | fills any of these conditions, the big prize opening which was the open state will be in a closed state.

  Hereinafter, a game in which the first grand prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 is in a state (open state) in which it is easy to accept a game ball is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the big prize opening is closed.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of “losing”), the gaming state does not shift except when the falling lottery is won.

  That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the gaming state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 44 while the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed, the variable of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. The display (holding ball) is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called “holding number (the number of holding balls)”) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second start opening 45 during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (holding number) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in this embodiment, the total number of variable symbols to be held is 8 at the maximum.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variation display of one special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the reserved ball of the first special symbol. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, When the reservation ball | bowl of a 1st special symbol and the reservation ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol coexist, you may make it perform the change display of a special symbol in the order kept.

[Normal symbol display device]
The normal symbol display device 62 is disposed in the lower right part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays a normal symbol (variation display and stop display) in a normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display device 62 includes a plurality of LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs). . In the normal symbol display device 62, a display pattern constituted by turning on / off each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

  The normal symbol display device 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol by turning on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs alternately when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs the normal symbol stop display after performing the normal symbol variation display for a predetermined time.

  In the normal symbol display device 62, when the stopped normal symbol is in a predetermined mode (a “win” mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

  That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 62, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

  If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the normal symbol variation display, the normal symbol variable display is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol that is currently in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable symbols of the normal symbol to be held (that is, the “holding number”) is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Normal symbol hold display device]
The normal symbol hold display device 63 is disposed in the lower right part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of hold of the variable symbol variable display. The normal symbol hold display device 63 includes a plurality of normal symbol hold display LEDs. Each normal symbol hold display LED is turned on / off to display the number of normal symbols variable display hold.

  Specifically, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays a normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of normal symbols variable display hold, and the normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of normal symbols variable display hold. Up to four lights.

[First special symbol hold display device]
The first special symbol hold display device 64 is arranged in the lower right part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The first special symbol hold display device 64 is a device that displays information related to variable display of the first special symbol being held (the hold ball of the first special symbol). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display device 64 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold display device 64 displays the first special symbol hold display LED according to the number of variable display hold of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first special symbol hold display LED. A maximum of four lights are turned on in accordance with the number of symbols that are variably displayed.

[Second special symbol hold display device]
The second special symbol hold display device 65 is arranged in the lower right part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The second special symbol hold display device 65 is a device that displays information related to variable display of the second special symbol being held (the hold ball of the second special symbol), and there are a plurality of second special symbol hold display devices 65. The second special symbol hold display LED is provided.

  Specifically, the second special symbol hold display device 65 displays the second special symbol hold display LED according to the number of variable display hold of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold display LED is the second special symbol hold display LED. A maximum of four lights are turned on according to the number of reserved special symbols.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko machines]
Next, the configuration of various circuits provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main control circuit 70 that mainly controls game operations, a sub-control circuit 200 that controls performance operations according to the progress of the game, and mainly game balls. A payout / launch control circuit 300 for performing control related to payout and launching.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory: abbreviated as “RWM”) 73. The main control circuit 70 also includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the present embodiment, a special symbol lottery process is performed when the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 is won, and this process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

  A main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, and the like are connected to the main CPU 71. The main ROM 72 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables, and the like.

  The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 functions as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values necessary for the main CPU 71 for various processes.

  In this embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable / writable storage medium. .

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process to be described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC 76 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, various devices that operate according to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

  Specifically, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected to the main control circuit 70. Is done.

  Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 performs operation control of variable symbol special display in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

  The main control circuit 70 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 46a, a first big prize opening solenoid 53b, and a second big prize opening solenoid 54b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first big prize opening solenoid 53b and the second big prize opening solenoid 54b, respectively, so that the first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are opened or closed. To do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various sensors and receives output signals from the various sensors. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes count sensors 53c and 54c, general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a, a passing ball sensor 43a, a first starting port winning ball sensor 44a and a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a, The area sensor 380A, the non-specific area sensor 380B, the backup clear switch 121, and the like are connected.

  The count sensor 53 c counts the game balls that have won the first grand prize opening 53 and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count sensor 54 c counts the game balls that have won the second grand prize opening 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

  The general winning ball sensor 51 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins the general winning opening 51. The general winning ball sensor 52 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins the general winning opening 52.

  The passing ball sensor 43 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 43.

  The first start port winning ball sensor 44 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins the first start port 44. The second start opening winning ball sensor 45 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the second starting opening 45.

  The specific area sensor 380A outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. The non-specific area sensor 380B outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  The backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout / launch control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared in response to an operation of a game shop manager or the like at the time of power interruption. .

  The main control circuit 70 is connected with a payout / launch control circuit 300. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The predetermined payout condition is that a game ball has won a prize at the above-mentioned various start-up openings and various prize-winning openings.

  The main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of prize balls determined as described above to the payout / firing control circuit 300 as a prize ball control command.

[Discharge / Launch Control Circuit]
The payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a microcomputer such as a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM. A payout device 170 is connected to the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the microcomputer of the payout / fire control circuit 300 controls, for example, a payout operation of a game ball by the payout device 170.

  In addition, to the payout / launch control circuit 300, a launching device 15 for launching a game ball, an external terminal board 140, and a card unit 150 are connected. A data display 141 is connected to the external terminal board 140, and a lending operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

  Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of rented balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The predetermined payout condition is that the lending operation unit 151 described above is operated.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the solenoid actuator of the launching device 15 according to the turning angle when the launching handle 25 is gripped by the player and is turned clockwise. . Thereby, the launching device 15 performs control to launch the game ball.

  The external terminal board 140 is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed, for example, as an incidental facility for a hall in the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function for calling a hall attendant and a function for displaying the number of hits.

  When operated by the player, the lending operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting lending of game balls to the card unit 150. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting lending of game balls from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a lending ball control signal including information on the determined lending ball number to the dispensing / launching control circuit 300.

  The payout / launch control circuit 300 receives a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and a lending ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 170. To do. Thereby, the payout device 170 pays out the game ball.

[Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. The sub-control circuit 200 controls the display control in the liquid crystal display device 13, the sound generated from the speaker 11, the control of the LEDs 59A to 59E, 59e to 59h, Control of the rendering operation by the shutter device 8 and the protruding device 9 is performed.

  That is, the sub-control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game based on the command from the main control circuit 70. In the present embodiment, a signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a signal can be transmitted from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. It may be provided with various configurations.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, an audio control circuit 206, an LED control circuit 207, and a drive control circuit 208. . A program ROM 202, work RAM 203, display control circuit 205, audio control circuit 206, LED control circuit 207, and drive control circuit 208 are connected to the sub CPU 201.

  The program ROM 202 stores various programs for controlling the presentation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201 and various data tables. Then, the sub CPU 201 executes various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as storage means for storing programs, various tables, and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a computer-readable storage medium provided with a control means. For example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM and a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, etc. The storage medium may be applied.

  In addition, each program may be recorded on a separate storage medium. Furthermore, the program may be recorded in advance on a recording medium, or may be downloaded from the outside after power-on and recorded in the main RAM 73, the work RAM 203, or the like.

  The work RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values necessary for the sub CPU 201 for various processes. In this embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable / writable storage medium.

  The display control circuit 205 performs control to display an image related to the effect on the liquid crystal display device 13. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

  The image data ROM stores data for generating various image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. The D / A converter converts image data (digital electric signal) into an image signal (analog electric signal).

  The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 205 also displays images such as decorative design image data, background image data, and presentation image data indicating a decorative design (production identification design) based on the production designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201. Data is temporarily stored in the frame buffer.

  Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal, and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The audio control circuit 206 includes a sound source IC that performs control related to audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying an audio signal, and the like.

  The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM based on the effect designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  The sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the read audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies it to the AMP. In addition, the AMP amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speaker 11.

  The LED control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, an LED data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED lighting patterns are stored, and the like. Based on the production designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201, the drive circuit selects one LED lighting / flashing pattern from a plurality of lighting / flashing patterns stored in the LED data ROM. As a result, the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are lit or blinking according to the lighting / flashing pattern.

  The drive control circuit 208 drives the effect drive motors 60 </ b> A to 60 </ b> E of the shutter device 8 and the protrusion device 9 based on the effect designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  Further, the sub-control circuit 200 includes effect sensors 210A to 210E for detecting the operation of the shutter device 8 and the protruding device 9, an effect button switch 230 for detecting that the effect button 23 is pressed, and a jog dial. A jog dial switch 240 that detects a rotation direction and an operation amount when 24 is rotated is connected. When the detection signals from the production sensors 210A to 210E are input as ON, the sub CPU 201 recognizes that the shutter device 8 and the protruding device 9 are in the standby state, and the detection signals from the production sensors 210A to 210E are off. Is input, it is recognized that the shutter device 8 and the protruding device 9 are in the rendering operation state. Further, the sub CPU 201 performs control so that a predetermined effect display is performed according to a detection signal (input signal) from the effect button switch 230 or the jog dial switch 240.

  Such a sub-control circuit 200 displays a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 13, causes the shutter device 8 and the protruding device 9 to perform a predetermined effect operation, and accordingly generates sound from the speaker 11. The LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are turned on or blinked to effect display.

[Send messages to various control circuits]
FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a procedure for transmitting effect designation information (message) from the sub CPU 201 serving as the host control circuit to the various control circuits 205 to 208.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the sub CPU 201 transmits effect designation information for designating the effect operation to each of the control circuits 205 to 208 in accordance with a communication format called a message. The message is also called a command, and is composed of, for example, 8 bytes. In the message, “device” (1 byte), “system” (1 byte), “reserved area” (2 bytes), “category” (2 bytes), “event” (2 bytes) An area for storing such control information is provided.

  The “device” stores control information for designating a device (control circuit) as a message transmission destination. The “system” stores control information for executing special operations such as system operation and debug processing of the entire sub-control circuit 200. The “reserve area” is reserved for reserve. “Category” stores control information for separating the production units. Control information for setting an operation pattern of a notice effect is mainly stored in the “event”. The spare area can be set to store various information according to the design of the gaming machine.

  The message is transmitted from the sub CPU 201 to a specified device (control circuit) via the directory buffer at a predetermined timing in accordance with the contents of the directory table described below. Each of the control circuits 205 to 208 that has received the message controls the operation related to the presentation based on the message. In the present embodiment, the display operation by the liquid crystal display device 13 is synchronized with the other operations by the speaker 11, the LEDs 59A to 59E, 59e to 59h, and the production drive motors 60A to 60E. Is delayed by a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, for example, one cycle corresponding to 1 frame (1/30 s)) by the corresponding control circuits 206 to 208 receiving and temporarily storing the message. Executed. The directory buffer is an area for temporarily storing a message until it is transmitted, and is secured in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203, for example. In the present embodiment, the voice control circuit 206 and the LED control circuit 207 are separated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice / LED control circuit may be configured by a single control circuit. Other operations are executed with a delay of one cycle corresponding to one frame. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is several frames or several cycles according to the messages stacked in the control circuits 206 to 208. It may be delayed. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 serving as a host control circuit may control the transmission timing to each of the control circuits 206 to 208, and each control circuit 206 to 208 may execute each control immediately after reception. In any case, the execution cycle may be delayed or may not be delayed.

  The direct table is a table that defines information for generating an action related to the production at a predetermined timing. Here, “generating an action related to the effect” is synonymous with transmitting a message. There are three types of direct tables: a master table, a slave table, and a single table.

  A master table is a table in which a plurality of master tables are not registered at the same time, and is mainly used when a decorative design changes. The slave table is a table that can be registered only when the master table is registered, that is, a table subordinate to the master table, and is mainly used for a notice effect or the like. Multiple slave tables can be registered simultaneously. Further, the same kind of slave table can be registered even in different master tables. When registering the slave table, an ID number is required, and an ID number that becomes a free number may be automatically assigned. When the master table is discarded, all the slave tables registered at that time are discarded. A single table is a table that does not depend on (subordinate to) the master table or slave table, and can be registered or discarded separately from the master table, and is used for effects that occur arbitrarily in various states, such as effects related to holding. The Multiple single tables can be registered simultaneously. An ID number is also required when registering a single table, but the ID number is registered without being automatically assigned to the specified ID number. In this embodiment, when the master table is discarded, all the registered slave tables are discarded at this time, but the slave table is not limited to this. Only the slave table corresponding to the master table may be discarded. In addition, although a plurality of master tables are not registered at the same time, there may be a situation where a plurality of master tables coexist as a result of registering the master tables in order corresponding to the effect to be executed. In such a situation, for example, even if the first master table is discarded, the second master table is not discarded. At this time, if there is a specific slave table that is identical between the slave table subordinate to the first master table and the slave table subordinate to the second master table, the first master table can also be discarded. The specific slave table may not be discarded. Such a specific slave table can be destroyed in response to the destruction of the second master table.

For example, the directory table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation of 13 seconds defines the following contents.
(1) A table (master table) corresponding to a fluctuation pattern of deviation from 13 seconds
1. 1. Call a table group for sending information at the start of fluctuation. 2. If a symbol variation start message is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (variation start information transmission table) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted. 4. Set table for notice effect as slave table in specified ID 4.270 frame (9s) weight If a symbol variation stop message is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (variation stop information transmission table) is set as a slave table, and the message is transmitted. 6.90 frame (3 s) weight 7. End of table (destroy the master table)
(2) Fluctuation start information transmission / variation stop information transmission table (slave table)
-If a message for background information is set in the directory buffer, the message is sent.-If a message for numeric symbol information is set in the directory buffer, the message is sent. )
1. If a message for mini character notice is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (table for mini character notice) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted 2. Wait for 30 frames (1 s). If the SU notice message is set in the directory buffer, the corresponding table (SU notice table) is set as the slave table and the message is transmitted. 4. Wait for 100 frames (about 3.3 s) 5. If a message for line warning is set in the directory buffer, the corresponding table (table for line warning) is set as a slave table, and a message for line warning is transmitted.

  According to the master table and the slave table of (1) to (3) above, as the fluctuation pattern deviated from 13 seconds is determined, the message for starting symbol fluctuation and the symbol for stopping symbol fluctuation, background information corresponding thereto are determined. Messages for numbers and symbol information, messages for mini character notification, SU notification, and serif notification are stored in the direct buffer, the symbol change start message at the 0th frame, and background information and numbers A message for symbol information and a message for notice of mini characters are sent, a message for notice of SU is sent after 30 frames, a message for notice of dialogue is sent after 100 frames, a message for stopping fluctuation of symbols after 270 frames, and A message for background information and numeric symbol information is transmitted. Thereby, a series of presentation operations are executed according to the transmission (reception) timing of each message. The directory table may directly specify the type and content of the message to be transmitted.

  Next, the data configuration and the like of the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Random number judgment table]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a hit random number determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The hit random number determination table (first start port) is based on the hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 44, and “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lost”. One of the above is referred to to determine by lottery. The winning random number determination table (second starting port) is determined by lottery based on a random number value for winning determination acquired when a game ball wins the second starting port 45 by lottery. Referenced when doing.

  The random number value for winning determination is a random value for determining a lottery result performed in response to the start opening prize. More specifically, the random number value for hit determination is a value indicating a lottery result of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the hit determination random number value is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 44, any one of “big hit”, “small win”, and “losing” is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the winning random number determination table (at the time of the first start opening winning), “big hit”, “small hit” for each value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”). And the range (width) of the winning judgment random values for which the winning of each “losing” is determined, and the corresponding judging value data (“big hit judging value data”, “small hit judging value data” and “losing judgment value”) Data ”). The probability change flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “probability change game state”. When the game state is “probability change game state”, the probability change flag is “1”, and when it is “non-probability change game state”, the probability change flag is “0”.

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening 44 is won, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number for winning determination is any one of “0” to “204”, “big hit” is won. , "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. In other words, the winning probability (hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319).

  In addition, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number value for winning determination is any one of “205” to “409” at the time of winning the first starting port 44, “small winning” is won, The “small hit determination value data” is determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319).

  Furthermore, when the first start opening 44 is won, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number for hit determination is not any of “0” to “409”, “Lose” is won and “Lose determination” Value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is any one of “0” to “1092” at the time of winning the first start opening 44, “Big hit” is won, Determination value data "is determined. In other words, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 1093/65536 (≈ 1/60), which is higher than that in the case where the probability variation flag is “0”.

  When the first start opening 44 is won, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is any one of “1093” to “1297”, “small hit” is won and “ The “small hit determination value data” is determined. In other words, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319), which is the same as when the probability variation flag is “0”.

  Furthermore, when the first start opening 44 is won, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is not any of “0” to “1297”, “losing” is won, and “losing determination” Value data "is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start port 44, the big hit probability varies depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probability changed game state”. Specifically, when the gaming state is the “probability changing gaming state”, the big hit probability when the gaming ball wins the first starting port 44 is about five times higher than when the gaming state is not the “probability changing gaming state”. .

  Similarly, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number value for winning determination is any one of “0” to “204” at the time of winning the second starting opening 45, “big hit” is won and “ The “hit determination value data” is determined. In other words, the winning probability (hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319).

  In addition, when the second start opening 45 is won, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number value for hit determination is not any of “205” to “409”, “losing” is won and “losing determination” Value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is “1” and the winning determination random value is any one of “0” to “1092” at the time of winning the second starting opening 45, “big hit” is won and “big hit” Determination value data "is determined. In other words, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 1093/65536 (≈ 1/60), which is higher than that in the case where the probability variation flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the second start opening 45 is won, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for winning determination is not any of “0” to “1092,” “losing” is won and “losing determination” Value data "is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the second start opening 45, whether or not the game state at the time of winning is “probability game state” without winning “small hit”. Depending on whether or not the jackpot probability fluctuates, the jackpot probability when the gaming state is “probability changing gaming state” is about five times higher than when it is not “probability changing gaming state”.

[Design determination table]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) is based on the symbol random number value acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 and the above-described determination value data. This is referred to in order to select a “hit selection symbol command” and a “symbol designation command” which determine the stop symbol. The “success selection symbol command” is a command for designating a symbol that is determined according to the type of winning at the time of winning, and the “symbol designation command” designates a symbol that is displayed when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It is a command to do. The design random number value is extracted from 0 to 99 (100 types), for example.

  According to the symbol determination table (first start port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “49”, 50/100 “Z0” is selected as the winning selection symbol command with the probability of “zA1” as the symbol designation command. When the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “50” to “99”, “z1” is selected as the symbol selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. “ZA1” is selected as the symbol designating command. In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “99”, “z2” is selected as the symbol selecting symbol command at the time of hitting, “ZA2” is selected. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any of “0” to “99”, the winning selection symbol command is not selected, and “zA3” is selected as the symbol designation command. Selected.

  Further, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “49”, 50 “Z3” is selected as the symbol selection symbol command with a probability of / 100, and “zA4” is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “50” to “99”, “z4” is selected as the symbol selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. “ZA5” is selected as the symbol designating command. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “99”, the winning selection symbol command is not selected, and “zA6” is selected as the symbol designation command. Selected.

[Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The jackpot type determination table is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type, such as the number of rounds and the V-winning ease, in accordance with the symbol selection command for the jackpot. In the present embodiment, if the big hit is won regardless of the type of the big hit, the hour / hour flag is set to “1”, and the hour / hour number is set to 100, for example. Further, only when the V win is won in the big hit gaming state, the probability variation number is set as 124 times, for example. The short time flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73 and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “short time gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “time saving gaming state”, the time saving flag is “1”, and when it is “non-time saving gaming state”, the time saving flag is “0”. The number of times shortened is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol game in which the time-short gaming state can be continued. In other words, if the special symbol change is made for the number of times (100 times) without winning a big win in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is ended and the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state. If a special symbol change corresponding to the number of times of probability variation is made without winning a big win in the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state is ended and the state is shifted to the non-probability variation gaming state.

  According to the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when the winning selection symbol command is “z0”, the jackpot that is difficult to win with the number of rounds “10” is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is “z1”, a big hit that allows easy V winning with the number of rounds being “10” is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is “z3”, the winning number is determined as “4” and the V winning is easy. When the winning selection symbol command is “z4”, a big hit that allows easy V winning with a round number of “16” is determined.

[Variation pattern table]
FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a first half variation pattern, a second half variation pattern, and a variation pattern table obtained by combining these, stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. These tables are referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type and the first and second half variation patterns based on the winning type at the time of winning a prize, the symbol designation command, and the like. The main CPU 71 transmits a combination of commands corresponding to the first half and second half fluctuation patterns to the sub-control circuit 200 as a fluctuation pattern designation command. In the following description, a combination of the first and second half variation patterns is simply referred to as a “variation pattern”.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines the type of variation pattern (for example, one of nine types of deviation variation pattern and nine types of winning variation pattern) based on the winning type at the time of winning a prize, a symbol designation command, etc. The first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern are determined. For example, when the “normal fluctuation” of the deviation fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern, “None” of the command “00H” is determined as the first half fluctuation pattern, and “low accuracy” of the command “00H” is determined as the second half fluctuation pattern. Either "Fluctuation 1 (4.0 seconds)" or "Low-accuracy fluctuation 2 (8.0 seconds)" of the command "01H" is determined. The variation pattern designation command corresponding to such “normal variation” is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as “0000H” or “0001H” combining the commands of the first and second half variation patterns. The variation pattern designation command may be written as “00H00H” or “00H01H”, for example.

  The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is a time obtained by combining the fluctuation times of the first half and the second half fluctuation pattern. For example, in the fluctuation pattern designation command “0000H”, the first half fluctuation pattern fluctuation time (0 ms) and the latter half fluctuation pattern fluctuation time (4000 ms) are combined (4000 ms). In the fluctuation pattern designation command “0102H”, the first half The time (21000 ms) is the sum of the variation time (11000 ms) of the variation pattern and the variation time (10000 ms) of the second-half variation pattern. As described above, since the first half and the latter half of the fluctuation pattern are determined in stages after the rough type is determined, diversification is achieved as a combination of the fluctuation patterns. It can be increased easily.

  In FIG. 38, for convenience, only 18 types of fluctuation patterns including the deviation and the hit are shown, but it is needless to say that more than that shown in FIG. “Pseudo 1 to 4” and “Special Pseudo 1 to 3” are variation patterns corresponding to so-called pseudo-continuations. Although details will be described later, “pseudo 1-4” is provided as a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-series such as a normal pseudo-series and a high-speed pseudo-series. For example, “pseudo 1 to 4 per pseudo” is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit via, for example, normal reach or SP reach after execution of pseudo continuous. “Low probability”, “ST”, and “latency” mean “non-probability changing gaming state”, “probability changing and short-time gaming state”, and “probability changing and non-time-short gaming state”, respectively. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern related to “Premier” is set only for the winning variation pattern. However, the variation pattern is not limited to this, and when “winning” and “V winning is easy” or “winning” It is good also as a fluctuation pattern which shows that it is rich (the expectation degree per hit is high).

[Game state transition table]
FIG. 39 shows a game state transition table stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The gaming state transition table includes a V winning failure / V winning success, a hit selecting symbol command (z0, z1, z3, z4) indicating a winning symbol, table patterns 1 to 3 to be described later, and the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit gaming state ( 1-700, 701-) are referred to for transitioning the gaming state. “Low timing” and “High timing” are “non-probability and short-time gaming state” and “probability and short-time gaming state” in the early stage after the jackpot gaming state ends (between 1 and 20 fluctuations in this embodiment). means. “Low time” and “high time” mean “non-probability and short-time gaming state” and “probability and short-time gaming state”. “Low final” and “High final” mean “non-probability and short-time gaming state” and “probability and short-time gaming state” in the number of changes (100th time in this embodiment) in which the short-time gaming state is final. . “Low” is a “non-probable and non-short game state” controlled using a table with a relatively low probability of selecting a variation pattern related to “Premier” (also referred to as “low table”). "" Is a "non-probable and non-short game state" controlled using a table (also referred to as "low pre-table") having a relatively high probability of selecting a variation pattern related to "Premier". “Hidden” is a probability variation non-short-time state, and “latent last” means “probability and non-time-short gaming state” in the number of times of variation (124th in this embodiment) that the probability variation gaming state is final. “Hidden” is also called “latent”. In the present embodiment, since the gaming state is shifted based on the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit, the gaming state is changed according to the number of fluctuations after the big hit ends for each of the table patterns 1 to 3 described later. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the table patterns 1 to 3 may be switched according to the number of fluctuations after the end of the small hit. In addition, as a method of calculating the number of fluctuations after the end of hitting (big hit / small hit), various calculation methods using, for example, a subtraction counter or an addition counter can be employed.

  “V certainty failure” is a case where no V winning (passing through the specific area 38A) occurs during the big hit, and “V certainty successful” is a case where a V winning occurs during the big winning. The winning selection symbol command “z0” indicating a winning symbol corresponds to a 10-round jackpot related to the special figure 1 (first special symbol) in which V winning is difficult, and “z1” is a special figure that makes V winning easy. 1 is equivalent to 10 rounds of big hit, “z3” is equivalent to 4 rounds of big win that is easy to win V 2 (second special symbol), and “z4” is easy to win V This corresponds to 16 rounds of big hits related to Special Figure 2 (second special symbol). Table pattern 1 is a table pattern that is selected first after the power is turned on, table pattern 2 is a table pattern that is selected after the end of the big hit gaming state in which the V probability fails, and table pattern 3 is a V pattern that is selected. It is a table pattern selected after the end of the successful jackpot gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 39, according to the gaming state transition table, after the power is turned on, the table pattern 1 is selected, and the gaming state becomes “low” until the big hit gaming state is entered regardless of the number of fluctuations. In addition, if the V-decision fails even if the game state shifts to the big hit gaming state, the table pattern 2 is selected. As the gaming state after the big hit, the number of times of change is “low order”, 21 to 99. “Low” until the 1st time, “Low” at the 100th time, “Low” until the 101st to the 200th time, “Low” until the 201st to 220th time, “Low” again until the 221th to 300th time, Until the 301st to 320th time "Low pre" again, "low" until the 321st to 400th times, "low pre" again until the 401st to 420th times, "low" again until the 421st to 500th times, "low pre" again until the 501st to 520th times, 521 to “Low” again until the 600th time, “low pre” again until the 601st to 620th time, “low” again until the 621th to 700th time, and “low” after the 701st time. On the other hand, when the game goes to the jackpot gaming state and the V-decision is successful, the table pattern 3 is selected. As the gaming state after the jackpot is over, the number of fluctuations is “high order” up to the 20th, 21st to 99th. Until "High", 100th "Highest final", 101-123th "latency", 124th "latent", 125th and later are table pattern 2 (in case of V certain failure) Similarly, “low” and “low pre” are repeated every predetermined number of fluctuations, and “low” after the 701st.

[Variation pattern selection table by game state]
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a gaming state-specific variation pattern selection table stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The game state-specific variation pattern selection table is divided into a time of loss and a time of hit, and is referred to in order to select a variation pattern according to various game states. According to the game state variation pattern selection table, “low”, “low pre”, “low order”, “low”, “low end”, “high order”, “high”, “high” For each gaming state such as “final”, “latent”, and “latent final”, a variation pattern type (any one of nine different variation patterns and nine different variation patterns) is selected with a predetermined probability. When the variation pattern type is selected, the first half and second half variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern are respectively determined with a predetermined lottery probability. The variation pattern type also corresponds to the type of the production pattern, and the production pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. For example, when the gaming state is “low” and a low table is used, when “pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 per” or “pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 premier” or the like is determined as the hit variation pattern corresponding to the big hit, the effect pattern For example, an effect pattern such as “per pseudo 1 to 4” or “pseudo 1 to 4 premier” can be selected. On the other hand, when the gaming state is “low pre” and a low pre-table is used, “pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 per” or “pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 premier” or the like is determined as the hit variation pattern corresponding to the big hit, As the production pattern, production patterns such as “per pseudo 1 to 4” or “pseudo 1 to 4 premier” can be selected in the same way, but the low pre-table is more “pseudo 1 to 4 premier than the low table. The selection probability of the production pattern related to “is high. On the other hand, the selection probability of the effect pattern related to “per pseudo 1 to 4” is higher in the low table than in the low pre-table.

  The lottery probabilities of the first and second half variation patterns are defined for each variation pattern type according to the number of holds (starting memory number), the gaming state, and the like, but the drawing of these lottery probabilities is omitted. In particular, in the case of “low final”, if the big hit is not won, “ST normal fluctuation” is always selected as the deviation fluctuation pattern, and “None” and “ST fluctuation 2 (3 seconds) are the first and second half fluctuation patterns. ”(Variation pattern designation command“ 00H05H ”) is unambiguously determined. On the other hand, if the big hit is won,“ per ST ”is always selected as the winning variation pattern, and“ none ”and“ The lottery probability is defined so that “ST for final variation” (variation pattern designation command “00H18H”) is uniquely determined. Even in the case of “highest final”, if the big hit is not won, “ST normal fluctuation” is always selected as the deviation fluctuation pattern, and “none” and “ST final fluctuation” (fluctuation pattern designation) are selected as the first and second half fluctuation patterns. Command “00H06H”) is determined unambiguously, but if the big hit is won, “per ST” is always selected as the hit variation pattern, and “none” and “ST final change per hit are selected as the first and second half change patterns. "(Variation pattern designation command" 00H18H ") is defined so that the lottery probability is uniquely determined. Also, in the case of “latent final”, if the big hit is not won, “latent probability normal variation” is always selected as the deviation variation pattern, and “none” and “latent probability final variation” ( The variation pattern designation command “00H0AH”) is unambiguously determined. On the other hand, if the big hit is won, “latent chance” is always selected as the winning variation pattern, and “none” and “latent” are selected as the first and second half variation patterns. The lottery probability is defined so that “per-reliability reach reach” (variation pattern designation command “00H1BH”) is uniquely determined.

  As shown by way of example in FIG. 41, in the case of V-successful success, “04H”, “05H”, “14H”, “15H” is selected based on a predetermined lottery probability according to the winning result of the big win in “high order”. The second half fluctuation pattern of “” can be selected. At “High”, the second half variation pattern of “04H”, “05H”, “07H”, or “16H”, “17H”, “19H” can be selected based on a predetermined lottery probability for each win result It is said. In the “highest time final”, the second half fluctuation pattern of “06H” or “18H” can be selected based on a predetermined lottery probability for each jackpot winning result. In “Hidden”, “08H”, “09H”, “0BH”, “0CH”, or “1AH”, “1BH”, “1CH”, “1DH” based on a predetermined lottery probability for each jackpot winning result. The latter half of the fluctuation pattern can be selected. In the “latent last”, the second half fluctuation pattern of “0AH” or “1BH” can be selected based on a predetermined lottery probability for each jackpot winning result. Incidentally, “high time order” corresponds to a section in which a story effect described later is executed, and “high time” corresponds to a section in which a battle effect described later is executed.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern related to “Premier” may be selected only when a big hit is won in the probability variation gaming state. In a non-probability variable gaming state such as “low” or “low pre”, in the case of a big hit win related to the second special symbol, a variation pattern related to “premier” may be selected. During the short-time gaming state, the variation pattern related to “Premier” may be selected only when the big hit winning related to the second special symbol is won. In the case of “winning at the low time” and “final at the high time”, the different deviation variation patterns are selected, but the same deviation variation pattern may be selected. In the case of “hiding”, in the case of the big hit winning for the second special symbol, the winning variation pattern of the variation pattern designation command “00H1AH” may be selected. In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern can be selected for “low probability order” and “high probability order”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selectable “19H” second half variation pattern may be selectable.

[Variation production table]
The upper two tables in FIG. 42 are diagrams showing the variation effect tables (premier low probability, premier high probability) stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. The variation effect table is divided into a premier low probability and a premier high probability, and is referred to in order for the sub CPU 201 to select an effect pattern based on the variation pattern designation command. The variation effect table includes a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 70, a variation time corresponding to the command, a random value range and a selection rate as a lottery condition of the sub control circuit 200, an effect pattern and an effect content as a lottery result. It prescribes. In the figure, a part of the variation effect table is extracted and shown. As shown in the figure, in the variable performance table (low Premier probability, high Premier probability), the selection rate of the Premier related production pattern (for example, “Pseudo 1 Premier”) is higher than the Premier low probability. Is high. On the other hand, for an effect pattern other than the premier (as an example, “pseudo 1SP (B)”), the premier low probability has a higher selectivity than the premier high probability. Note that the selection rate of “pseudo 1 premier” or “pseudo 1 SP (B)” may be 0 in one variation effect table.

  The variation effect table related to such a premier effect is switched according to “low” and “low pre” defined in the above-described gaming state transition table. In other words, in the state of “low” according to the number of changes, the possibility that the premier effect is selected based on the change pattern related to “premier” by applying the change effect table (premier low probability) is relatively On the other hand, in the state of “low pre” according to the number of changes, there is a possibility that the premier effect will be selected based on the change pattern related to “Premier” by applying the change effect table (premier high probability) Becomes relatively high. In this way, since the fluctuating effect table related to the premier effect is switched according to the number of times of change, the possibility of appearance of the premier effect becomes higher or lower according to the number of times of change, changing the ease of appearance of the premier effect. It can enhance interest. Note that the variable effect table relating to the premier effect may be managed by the main control circuit 70, and the main CPU 71 may perform a lottery relating to the premier effect using this table.

[Chance production table]
The two tables on the lower side of FIG. 42 are diagrams showing chance effect tables (A pattern and B pattern) stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. The chance effect table is divided into an A pattern and a B pattern, and the sub CPU 201 is referred to in order to select a chance effect effect pattern, which will be described later, based on the variation pattern designation command. The chance effect table includes a change pattern designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 70, a change time corresponding thereto, a random value range and a selection rate as a lottery condition of the sub-control circuit 200, an effect pattern and an effect content as a lottery result. It prescribes. In the figure, a part of the chance effect table is extracted. As shown in the figure, in the chance effect table (A pattern), although there is a possibility that an effect pattern of “normal variation effect B” in which the chance effect is executed at a relatively late timing may be selected, the chance at an early timing While there is no possibility of selecting the “normal fluctuation effect C” effect pattern in which the effect is executed, in the chance effect table (B pattern), the possibility of selecting the “normal variation effect C” effect pattern is also possible. It has come to be. Note that the variable effect table (premier low probability), the variable effect table (premier high probability), the chance effect table (A pattern), and the chance effect table (B pattern) shown in FIG. 42 are all shown as examples. Yes, when a chance effect table (A pattern) is used instead of a variable effect table (premier low probability), and a chance effect table (B pattern) is used instead of a variable effect table (premier high probability) However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the selection ratios of the chance effect table (A pattern) and the chance effect table (B pattern) are each without the chance effect, the chance effect is executed at a late timing, and the chance effect is generated at an early timing As a selection rate for execution It is also possible to control so as to.

[Pre-reading effect table]
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a prefetch effect table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. The pre-reading effect table is referred to in order for the sub CPU 201 to select an effect pattern related to a so-called pre-reading effect based on the variation pattern designation command. The pre-reading effect table defines a variation pattern designation command, a random value range, a selection rate, an effect pattern that is a lottery result, and effect contents. In the figure, a part of the pre-reading effect table is extracted and shown. As shown in the figure, in the prefetch effect table, a prefetch effect described later is determined based on the variation pattern designation command.

[Direction pattern determination table]
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an effect pattern determination table (for a normal stage and for a specific stage) stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. The effect pattern determination table is divided into those for the normal stage and for the specific stage, and is referred to so that the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern for battle effect based on the variation pattern designation command. The effect pattern determination table includes a change pattern designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 70, a change time corresponding thereto, a random value range and a selection rate as a lottery condition of the sub-control circuit 200, an effect pattern and an effect content as a lottery result. Is stipulated. In the figure, a part of the effect pattern determination table is extracted and shown. As shown in the figure, in the effect pattern determination table (for the normal stage and for the specific stage), the selection rate of “intermediate role effect” described later is higher for the specific stage than for the normal stage. Such an effect pattern determination table includes a probabilistic and short-time gaming state (“high time”, “high”, “high final”), and a probable and non-short gaming state (“latent”, “latent”). ). The latter half fluctuation pattern “19H” may be selected only in the case of 16R big hit. In the present embodiment, a non-probable and short-time gaming state (“low time”, “low time”, “low-time final”) can be selected in an effect pattern and a probable and short-time gaming state (“high time”). , “High time”, “high time final”), the selectable production patterns are the same, but may be different. The effect pattern related to the hit at the time of change in the “latent last” is different from the effect pattern related to the hit at the time of change in the “last at high” and may not be the effect pattern dedicated to the “latent last”. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of stages. For example, a plurality of stages classified into normal stages and a plurality of stages classified into specific stages may exist. In addition, various combinations are conceivable, such as when there are a plurality of one stage and the other stage is present alone, or when both stages are present alone.

[High-speed pseudo-ream]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-speed pseudo-ream. In the present embodiment, the high-speed simulation sequence is performed when the first half variation pattern is “pseudo 1”, “pseudo 2”, “pseudo 3”, or “pseudo 4”. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect in which, for example, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed while being fluctuated and then changed and displayed again. The high-speed pseudo-ream is a re-variable display pattern (eg, 3. 5s or 7s). In this embodiment, as described below with reference to FIG. 45, eight types of high-speed pseudo-reams are provided for convenience.

  “Pseudo 1” is an effect in which the high-speed pseudo-ream is performed three or four times within a time corresponding to one normal pseudo-ream (for example, 14 s). In the high-speed quasi-continuation three times, a re-variable display pattern of 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 7 s (development 1) is repeatedly executed. In the high-speed quasi-continuous four times, a re-variable display pattern of 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (development 1) is repeatedly executed. Note that “stage 1”, “development 1”, and the like mean the display mode of decorative symbols and the contents of effects.

  “Pseudo 2” is an effect in which a high-speed pseudo-ream is performed eight times within a time period corresponding to two normal pseudo-reams (for example, 28 s or 35 s). In the high-speed pseudo sequence 8 times (A), 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (development 1) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → The re-variable display pattern of 3.5 s (stage 2) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → 3.5 s (development 2) is repeatedly executed. In the high-speed pseudo sequence 8 times (B), 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 7 s (development 1) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → 7 s ( The re-variable display pattern of development 2) → 3.5 s (stage 3) → 3.5 s (development 3) is repeatedly executed.

  “Pseudo-3” is an effect in which the high-speed pseudo-ream is performed 13 times or 15 times within a time corresponding to three times of the normal pseudo-ream (for example, 52.5 s). In 13 high-speed pseudo-reams, 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 7 s (development 1) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → 7 s (development 2) → 3.5 s (stage 3) → 3.5 s (stage 3) → 3.5 s (stage 4) → 3.5 s (stage 4) → 3.5 s (stage 4) → 3.5 s (stage 4) → 3 Repeated display pattern such as .5s (development 4) is repeatedly executed. In 15 high-speed pseudo-continuations, 33.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (development 1) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → 3.5 s (Stage 2) → 3.5 s (Stage 2) → 3.5 s (Development 2) → 3.5 s (Stage 3) → 3.5 s (Development 3) → 3.5 s (Stage 4) → 3.5 s (Stage 4) → 3.5 s (stage 4) → 3.5 s (stage 4) → 3.5 s (development 4) The re-variable display pattern is repeatedly executed.

  “Pseudo 4” is an effect in which high-speed pseudo-reams are performed 19 times or 20 times within a time period corresponding to four times of normal pseudo-reams (for example, 70 s). In the 19th high-speed pseudo-ream, 33.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (development 1) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → 3.5 s (Stage 2) → 3.5 s (Stage 2) → 3.5 s (Development 2) → 3.5 s (Stage 3) → 3.5 s (Development 3) → 3.5 s (Stage 4) → 3.5 s (Stage 4) → 3.5 s (Stage 4) → 3.5 s (Stage 4) → 3.5 s (Development 4) → 3.5 s (Stage 5) → 3.5 s (Stage 5) → 3.5 s (Stage 5) The re-variable display pattern such as 7s (Development 5) is repeatedly executed. In 20 high-speed quasi-continuations, 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (development 1) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → 3.5 s (Stage 2) → 3.5 s (Stage 2) → 3.5 s (Development 2) → 3.5 s (Stage 3) → 3.5 s (Development 3) → 3.5 s (Stage 4) → 3.5 s (Stage 4) → 3.5 s (Stage 4) → 3.5 s (Stage 4) → 3.5 s (Development 4) → 3.5 s (Stage 5) → 3.5 s (Stage 5) → 3.5 s (Stage 5) The re-variable display pattern of 3.5 s (stage 5) → 3.5 s (development 5) is repeatedly executed. In particular, in the high-speed quasi-continuous 20 times, a temporary stop at a so-called disjoint eye (for example, a decorative pattern display mode such as “556”) is performed 19 times, and a reach eye (eg, “5 ↓ 5”) Are temporarily stopped once in the display mode) in which the decorative symbols of the same are the same and the central decorative symbols are variably displayed. The normal pseudo-series or the high-speed pseudo-series may be executable over a plurality of variations.

[Button Strike Rank Up Scenario Table]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a button continuous hit rank-up scenario table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. The button hitting rank-up scenario table is referred to in order to select a threshold value (LV1 to 4) and a lottery pattern for determining the rank-up of the contents of the action in the later-described button hitting effect using the effect button 23. The button hitting rank-up scenario table is, for example, an operation effective time of the effect button 23 divided every 300 ms, a scenario (1-8) selected in advance for the button hitting effect, and a threshold value determined according to the operation effective time for each scenario. (LV1 to 4) and a rank-up lottery pattern described later are defined. In the button striking effect, each time the effect button 23 is operated, a lottery of whether or not points are given based on a rank-up lottery pattern to be described later is performed, and a cumulative value of points given according to the lottery result ( When the level becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value (LV1 to 4) in the predetermined operation effective time, the rank is increased to LV1 to 4 according to the threshold value. The initial level of rank-up is LV0, and when the rank is finally raised to LV4, for example, an effect of displaying an icon image is executed so as to suggest that the degree of expectation of jackpot is large. Note that the threshold increases as LV1, LV2, LV3, and LV4. The degree of expectation of the jackpot is suggested not only in the button hitting effect but also in other effects, and the contents of the table that defines the effect pattern as equivalent to the probability of being a “hit” when each effect pattern is executed It is calculated mathematically from

  For example, when scenario 4 is selected, it is determined whether or not the cumulative value of points given based on the rank-up lottery pattern has reached the threshold value LV2 until the operation valid time is 0 to 900 ms. At this time, since the difference between the threshold LV2 and the initial level LV0 is 2 or more, the rank-up lottery pattern is set to a high probability, and points are easily given. Thereby, when the accumulated point value reaches the threshold LV2, the rank is increased to LV2 corresponding to the threshold. On the other hand, if the accumulated point value does not reach the threshold LV2, the initial level LV0 is maintained. Next, it is determined whether or not the cumulative value of points given based on the rank-up lottery pattern has reached a higher threshold LV3 until the operation valid time is 900 to 2400 ms. At this time, if the level based on the current cumulative point value is LV2, the level difference between the LV2 and the threshold LV3 is less than 2, so a low probability is set as the rank-up lottery pattern, and points are given. It becomes difficult. Thereby, if the accumulated point value does not reach the threshold LV3, the level LV2 or LV0 is maintained. On the other hand, if the accumulated point value reaches the threshold LV3, the rank is increased to LV3 corresponding to the threshold.

  Similarly, until the operation valid time 2400 to 3600 ms, it is determined whether or not the accumulated point value has reached the threshold value LV4. If the accumulated point value has not reached the threshold value LV4, the level is maintained at LV3, LV2, or LV0. On the other hand, when the accumulated point value reaches the threshold LV4, the rank is increased to LV4 of a level corresponding to the threshold. Furthermore, points are not awarded by the rank-up lottery pattern being set to “No”, which will be described later, until the operation valid time 3600 to 6000 ms. As a result, the current level is maintained. In this way, when the level difference between the current level and the threshold value increases to some extent, such as 2 or more, the rank-up lottery pattern becomes highly probable, and as a result, even if the number of operations within the operation effective time is small, the accumulated point value Is likely to increase, and as a result, ranks are easily increased. In addition, the rank-up lottery pattern has “success / failure” described later. In this case of “success / failure”, points are more difficult to be given than the low probability, but the probability of giving points is zero. There is no point, and points are given with a certain probability. As shown in FIG. 46, a threshold value that is the upper limit of LV1 to LV4 is set for each operation effective time, but is not limited to this, and for example, LV1 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/250) Exception processing may be performed so that the level increases beyond the upper limit of ˜4. For example, when the effective operation time of scenario 2 is 300, as a result of operating the production button 23, a rank-up lottery is performed, and if the lottery result is won with a probability of 1/250, the level is exceptionally changed from LV1 to LV4. Can be raised.

[Rank up lottery table]
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a rank-up lottery table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. The rank-up lottery table is referred to together with the above-described button hitting rank-up scenario table. The rank-up lottery table is promoted (points given) or not (points given) for each rank-up lottery pattern (“No lottery”, “Low probability”, “High probability”, “Success / failure”, “No”) Nothing) is specified. “No lottery” in the rank-up lottery pattern is selected when the LV4 is finally reached based on the button hitting rank-up scenario table. “Low probability” and “high probability” of the rank-up lottery pattern are applied when referring to the corresponding threshold value “LV1 to 4” in the button continuous hit rank-up scenario table, and the difference between the current level and the threshold value is 2 In the case of less than, “low probability” (100/250) is applied as the probability of promotion (with points), while when the difference between the current level and the threshold is 2 or more, there is promotion (with points) ) Is “high probability” (200/250). The “success / failure” and “failure” in the rank-up lottery pattern are applied when referring to “success / failure” and “failure” in the button continuous hit rank-up scenario table. May be ranked at 50/250, so there is a possibility of ranking up. On the other hand, with “No”, the probability of promotion (with point grant) is 0 and no points are awarded. There is no possibility of.

  The various processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 48 shows a power-on process by the main CPU 71. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 sets an initial value in the stack pointer (S11).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is ON (S12). The power interruption detection signal is turned ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, for example. When the power interruption detection signal is ON, the main CPU 71 determines that the power interruption detection state is present, and repeats the process of S12 until the power interruption detection signal is turned OFF. When the power interruption detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 71 determines that the power interruption is detected, and the process proceeds to S13.

  In S13, the main CPU 71 permits access to the RWM (main RAM).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process that waits until the sub control circuit 200 can accept a signal (S14).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (S15).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing to clear the backup contents of the main RAM 73 provided in the main CPU 71 constituting the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout / launch control circuit 300. . When the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S17.

  In S17, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power interruption detection flag is set on. The power interruption detection flag is a flag indicating that power interruption processing has been executed in response to the occurrence of power interruption. When the power interruption detection flag is set on, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S18. When the power interruption detection flag is set off, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S23.

  In S <b> 18, the main CPU 71 performs a work area damage check on the main RAM 73 using, for example, a checksum.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the work area is normal (S19). When the work area is normal, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S23.

  In S <b> 20, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when power is restored.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs notification setting for the high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) at the time of restoration of power interruption (S21).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs processing for transmitting a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200 (S22). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the power-on process.

  In S <b> 23, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the work area of the main RAM 73.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM) (S24).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs processing for transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub-control circuit 200 (S25).

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes a variation pattern table setting process (S26). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the power-on process.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 49 shows system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 71. The system timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, for example. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 73 (S31).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs random number update processing for updating various random number values (32).

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (S34).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs command output processing for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (S35).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs game information output processing for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub-control circuit 200 (S36). The game information is information relating to a game processed in the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like, and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer. .

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the saved register values (S37). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 50 shows switch input detection processing by the main CPU 71. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described system timer interrupt process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 executes a start opening winning detection process (S41). The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a general winning opening detection process (S42). In the general winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts at the time of winning a prize to the general winning openings 51 and 52 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special winning opening passing detection process (S43). In the special winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is acquired in accordance with the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Start-up winning detection processing]
FIG. 51 shows start opening winning detection processing by the main CPU 71. The start opening prize detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first start opening winning ball sensor 44a (S51). When the first start-port winning ball sensor 44a detects a game ball, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S52. When the first start opening winning ball sensor 44a does not detect a game ball, the main CPU 71 shifts to a process of S59.

  In S52, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting payout information corresponding to the first start opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of first start slot winnings held (the number of first special symbols held) is less than four (S53). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S54. When the number of the hold is 4, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S59.

  In S54, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of acquiring the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value and storing these random number values in the main RAM 73 (S55).

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a first special stop symbol determination process (S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the winning random number determination table (first start port), the symbol determination table (first start port), and the big hit type determination table are referred to based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. Then, a symbol designating command, a winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes variation pattern determination processing (S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol is determined by referring to the gaming state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, determination value data, gaming state, and table pattern. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts processing for setting a command for increasing the number of reserved first start opening prizes (S58). The command for increasing the number of reserved symbols for the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol is incremented by 1, and the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of S57 is sent to the sub-control circuit 200. Sent.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the second start-up winning ball sensor 45a (S59). When the game ball is detected by the second start opening winning ball sensor 45a, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S60. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a, the main CPU 71 ends the starting opening winning detection process.

  In S60, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting payout information corresponding to the second start opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of retained second start opening prizes (the number of retained second special symbols) is less than four (S61). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S62. When the number of reserved is 4, the main CPU 71 ends the start opening winning detection process.

  In S62, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved second start opening prizes.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of acquiring a random number value for winning determination and a design random number value and storing these random number values in the main RAM 73 (S63).

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts second special stop symbol determination processing (S64). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value, and the hit random number determination table (second start port) and the symbol determination table (second With reference to the big hit type determination table, the symbol designating command, the winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes a variation pattern determination process (S65). This variation pattern determination process also refers to the gaming state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, determination value data, gaming state, and table pattern to determine the variation pattern related to the second special symbol. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts processing for setting a second start opening prize holding number increase command (S66). The second start opening prize hold number increase command is a command indicating that the hold number of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of S65. Sent. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the start opening winning detection process.

[Variation pattern determination process]
FIG. 52 shows the variation pattern determination process performed by the main CPU 71. The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 refers to a gaming state transition table and a variation pattern selection table based on a table pattern, a hit determination random number value, and a design random number value, which will be described later, and selects a variation pattern type. (S71).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of selecting the first half and second half fluctuation patterns based on a predetermined lottery probability from the selected fluctuation pattern types (S72). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the variation pattern determination process.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 53 shows main control main processing by the main CPU 71. When power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process (S81). In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing such as the power-on processing described above.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs initial value random number update processing (S82). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process (S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol control process (S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a symbol display device control process (S85). In this process, the main CPU 71 drives the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 73 in S83 and S84. The control signal is stored in the main RAM 73. As a result, the main CPU 71 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62, and the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 transmit the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal. Is displayed in a variable and stopped display.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts game information data generation processing (S86). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates a game state command relating to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores it in the main RAM 73.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts storage / game state data generation processing (S87). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S82.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 54 shows a special symbol control process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Note that the numerical values (“00” to “08”) described in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 advances the special symbol game by executing a process according to the value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the main CPU 71 performs a process of loading a control state flag (S91). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute each process of S92 to S100 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of S92 to S100. Further, the main CPU 71 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of S92 to S100. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing the processes. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 49) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory check process (S92). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of reserved special symbols for variable display, and the number of reserved is not “0”. When there is a holding ball, the winning determination result obtained by the start opening winning detection process, the determination result of the special symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol fluctuation time management process (S93) described later, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the current process. Set the special symbol variation time in the waiting time timer. That is, the special symbol fluctuation time management process described later is executed after the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 71 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts special symbol variation time management processing (S93). In this process, the main CPU 71 has a value ("01") indicating that the control state flag indicates the special symbol change time management process. A value ("02") indicating the time management process (S94) is set, and the waiting time after determination is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the waiting time after determination set in the process of S93 has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol display time management process (S94). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines the result of the hit determination when the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”) and the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of S93 has elapsed. Is “big hit” or “small hit”. When the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“03”) indicating a big hit start interval management process (S95) described later in the control state flag, Set the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval in the latency timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the processing of S94 has elapsed, the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process (S100) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs jackpot start interval management processing (S95). In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the first value when the control state flag is a value indicating the jackpot start interval management process (“03”) and the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of S94 has elapsed. Based on the data read from the main ROM 72, the variables located in the main RAM 73 are updated in order to open the special winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54. Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a large winning opening opening process (S96), which will be described later, in the control state flag, and the upper opening limit time (for example, 30 seconds) of the large winning opening. ) Is set in the grand opening opening time timer. That is, this process is set so that a process for opening a special prize opening, which will be described later, is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a special winning opening opening process (S96). In this process, first, the main CPU 71 sets the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is a predetermined number or more when the control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the big prize opening opening process, and the release. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has passed (the big winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the first big prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“05”) indicating a later-described extra winning opening residual ball monitoring process (S97) in the control state flag, and sets the extra winning opening residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. . In other words, this process is set such that the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process, which will be described later, is executed after the super winning prize residual ball monitoring time set in S97 has elapsed. Note that an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the special winning opening opening process.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (S97). In this process, the main CPU 71 indicates that the control status flag is a value (“05”) indicating the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening (the final round) is satisfied. If it is determined that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“06”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S97 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value ("07") indicating the big hit end interval process in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the big hit end interval (the big hit end interval time). ) Is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the big winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or larger than the maximum value of the large winning opening number, the main CPU 71 performs a waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening (S98). In this process, the main CPU 71 indicates that the control status flag is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the main winning opening is opened. The number of times counter is updated so as to increase it by “1”. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating the process for opening the special winning opening to the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 71 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the big prize opening time timer. That is, it is set so that the above-described special prize opening opening process (S96) is executed again in this process. It should be noted that a display command indicating that the big prize opening is being opened is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the completion of the waiting time management process before the big prize opening reopening.

  Further, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the big prize opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the big opening number, the big hit end interval process is performed (S99). In this process, the main CPU 71 has a value ("07") indicating that the control state flag indicates the jackpot end interval process, and a value indicating the special symbol game end process ("" when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed). 08 ") is set in the control state flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of S99. At this time, if the V winning in the big hit is successful, the main CPU 71 performs control to shift the gaming state to the probability changing gaming state, and if the V winning in the big hit fails, the main CPU 71 Control to shift to the probable gaming state. When the big hit symbol is a symbol corresponding to “small hit”, the main CPU 71 performs control to maintain the gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state ends or when “losing” is won (S100). In this process, when the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“08”), the main CPU 71 stores and updates the data indicating the number of holdings (starting storage information) to be decreased by “1”. To do. Further, the main CPU 71 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next special symbol variation display. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol storage check process (S92) described above is set to be executed after the process of S100. When this special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol control process.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 71 sets the control status flags to “00”, “01”, “ 02 ”and“ 08 ”in this order. Thereby, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special symbol memory check process (S92), special symbol variation time management process (S93), special symbol display time management process (S94), and special symbol game end process (S100) in this order. Execute at a predetermined timing.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets the control status flag to “00”, “01” when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”. , “02”, “03” in this order. Thereby, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special symbol storage check process (S92), special symbol variation time management process (S93), special symbol display time management process (S94), and jackpot start interval management process (S95) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, and “06”. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (S96), the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (S57), and the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process (S98) in this order at a predetermined timing. And execute a big hit game or a small hit game.

  If the end condition for the big hit gaming state is satisfied during the big hit gaming state, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, “08”. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (S96), the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (S97), the big hit end interval process (S99), and the special symbol game end process (S100) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing to end the big hit gaming state.

  As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Also, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 60 described later) in S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 53 also branches the process flow according to the status, as in the special symbol control process.

  The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module is possible with a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in this embodiment as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 55 shows a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 71 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 73 by a load process (S111).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol storage check process (“00”) (S112). When determining that the control state flag is not “00”, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00”, the main CPU 71 shifts to a process of S113.

  In S113, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start memorized number) of the second start opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 71 determines that the number of second start opening winnings is not “0”, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S114. If the main CPU 71 determines that the number of the second start slot winning prizes is “0”, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S119.

  In S <b> 114, the main CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the second start memory number corresponding to the second start opening winning number. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being changed or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being changed is stored as start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol for four times held. Are stored as start-up storage information. Note that the start storage information in each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a winning determination random number value, a symbol random number value acquired at the time of winning the second start port 45, a determined variation pattern, and the like. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the second start opening winning (S115). In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S116.

  In S116, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit / small hit determination process (S117). In this process, the main CPU 71 obtains the jackpot determination random number value extracted at the time of winning the start opening and set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on the winning determination table (see FIG. 35) corresponding to the type of the winning start port, determination value data is acquired. Then, the main CPU 71 determines (hit determination) which of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lose” is won based on the acquired determination value data.

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (S118). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  In S119, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start memorized number) of the first start opening prize (variable display of the first special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not “0”, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S120. If the main CPU 71 determines that the number of first start opening prizes held is “0”, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S122.

  In S <b> 120, the main CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the first start memory number corresponding to the reserved number of first start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73, and It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being changed or on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the changing first special symbol is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for four times held. Are stored as start-up storage information. Note that the start storage information in each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a random number value for winning determination and a design random number value acquired when winning the first start port 44, a determined variation pattern, and the like. It is.

  Next, a special symbol memory transfer process is performed based on the first start opening prize (S121). In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S116.

  In S122, the main CPU 71 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 71 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 56 shows a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating a special symbol display time management process (S131). When determining that the control state flag is not a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”), the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S132.

  In S132, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time after change confirmation (variation start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S133.

  In S133, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is “big hit”. When determining that the special symbol game is “big hit”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S142. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S134.

  In S134, the main CPU 71 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is “small hit”. When determining that the special symbol game is “small hit”, the main CPU 71 shifts to a process of S137. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not “small hit”, that is, when the special symbol game is “missed”, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S135.

  In S <b> 135, the main CPU 71 performs time-shortening / probability variation subtraction processing. This time / probability variation subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag (S136). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In S137, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S138.

  In S138, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (S139).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 73 (S140). As a result, a big hit start command or a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 37) and sets the round number upper limit value (large winning opening release upper limit value) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designating command) in the main RAM 73. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (S141). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In S142, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the time reduction state variation counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S138.

[Time reduction and subtraction processing for accuracy variation]
FIG. 57 shows time-shortening / accurate variation number subtraction processing by the main CPU 71. The time reduction / probability variation number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the short-time state variation number counter is 0 (S151). The short-time state variation number counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set short-time number (in this embodiment, 100 times as an example) becomes zero. When the value of the short time state change frequency counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S155. If the value of the short-time state variation number counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S152.

  In S152, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the short-time state variation number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines again whether or not the value of the short-time state variation number counter is 0 (S153). When the value of the short time state change frequency counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S154. If the value of the short-time state fluctuation number counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S155.

  In S154, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” as the time reduction flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S155.

  In S155, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is zero. The probability variation state change count counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set probability variation count (in this embodiment, 124 times as an example) becomes zero. When the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is 0, the main CPU 71 ends the time reduction / accuracy variation number subtraction process. When the value of the probability variation state frequency counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S156.

  In step S156, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation state change number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines again whether or not the value of the probability variation state variation counter is 0 (S157). When the value of the probability variation state variation counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S158. If the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 ends the time reduction / accuracy variation number subtraction process.

  In S158, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” as the probability variation flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the time-shortening / probability variation subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 58 shows the big hit end interval process by the main CPU 71. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating a big hit end interval process (S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value indicating the jackpot end interval process (“07”) (S161: NO), the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit end interval process (“07”), the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S162.

  In S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S163.

  In S163, the main CPU 71 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of the big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

  Next, the main CPU 71 clears the round number distribution flag (S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and the first big prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 is cyclically set a predetermined number of times even during one round. This is a flag for indicating whether or not to open and close. When the first grand prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes “1”. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a special symbol end display command to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag (S165).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a “hit” (S166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is “big hit”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S167. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not “big hit”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S174.

  In S167, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big hit flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning is successful during the big hit (S168). When the V winning is successful, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S169. When the V winning is unsuccessful, the main CPU 71 shifts to a process of S171.

  In S169, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting “1” as the probability variation flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a specified probability variation number (124 times as an example in the present embodiment) in a probability variation state variation frequency counter (S170).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting “1” as the time reduction flag (S171).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a specified time reduction number (100 times as an example in the present embodiment) in the time reduction state change frequency counter (S172).

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes a variation pattern table setting process (S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process.

  In S174, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the value of the small hit flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes the above-described subtraction / probability number subtraction process (S175). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 59 shows the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 71. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power is on (S181). When the power is turned on, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S182. When the power is not turned on, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S183.

  In S182, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation flag is “1” (S183). When the value of the probability variation flag is “1”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S184. When the value of the probability variation flag is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S185.

  In S184, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

  In S185, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 60 shows normal symbol control processing by the main CPU 71. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. 60, the numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the left side of each processing in the flowchart shown in FIG. Stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 71 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the main CPU 71 performs processing for loading the normal symbol control state flag (S191). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 73. Based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes of S192 to S196 described later. The normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and enables one of the processes of S162 to S166 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 71 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of S162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 49) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol memory check process (S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of holdings of the normal symbol variable display, and the number of holdings is “0”. If not, a process such as a hit determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“01”) indicating a later-described normal symbol variation time monitoring process (S193) in the ordinary symbol control state flag, and waits for the variation time determined in this processing. Set to time timer. In other words, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the determined variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed by the process of S192.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs normal symbol variation time monitoring processing (S193). In this process, the main CPU 71 indicates that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, and when the variation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag is described later. A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (S194) is set, and a waiting time after determination (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the normal symbol display time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the set post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed by the process of S193.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts normal symbol display time monitoring processing (S194). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines a hit when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after determination set in the process of S193 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result of is “hit”. When the result of the hit determination is “hit”, the main CPU 71 conducts a normal electric accessory release setting process, and the normal symbol control state flag indicates a value (“ 03 ") is set. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary electric accessory release process is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not “win”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game end process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 71 determines in S194 that the result of the hit determination is “hit”, the main CPU 71 performs a normal electric accessory release process (S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process, the main CPU 71 has received a predetermined number of winnings during the opening of the normal electric accessory 46. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 has elapsed (the ordinary electric role opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When the above one condition is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to put the blade-like member, which is the ordinary electric accessory 46, in a closed state. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described normal symbol game end process (S196) in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol game end process (S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 71 decreases the data indicating the number of holdings of the variable symbol variable display by “1”. Update the memory. Further, the main CPU 71 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next normal symbol variation display. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of S196, the above-described normal symbol storage check process (S192) is set to be executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub-control circuit 200 executes the sub-control circuit main process. The sub control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. The sub control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, and backup restoration initialization (S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for clearing the counter value of the watch dog timer (S202). When the watchdog timer is activated, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set, and when the service pulse is not written (timeout), the power interruption process is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an operation means input process (S203). The operation means input process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect mode determination process (S205). The effect mode determination process includes subroutines such as an effect change effect control process, an interface notice setting process, a pseudo-continuous effect determination process, a V effect setting process, a button repeated effect setting process, a safe mode setting process, and a special effect setting process, which will be described later. . These processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 62, when an aspect relating to an effect such as a change effect pattern, an effect pattern, a notice effect, an effect, etc. is determined as an effect mode by each process of the effect mode determination process, an effect indicating this is shown. Information is generated.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command transmission processing (S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, in the command transmission process, the aforementioned message (effect designation information) is generated based on the effect information, and this message is transmitted to each control circuit.

  Next, the display control circuit 205 executes a drawing control process (S207). In this processing, the display control circuit 205 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 13 based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the voice control circuit 206 executes a voice control process (S208). In this process, the audio control circuit 206 performs audio control for causing the speaker 11 to output audio based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the LED control circuit 207 executes LED control processing (S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 207 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the drive control circuit 208 executes an accessory control process (S210). In this process, the drive control circuit 208 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motors 60 </ b> A to 60 </ b> E related to the movable accessory based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub control circuit main process, after the initialization process of S201 is completed, each process of S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Button input interrupt processing]
FIG. 63 shows button input interrupt processing by the sub CPU 201. The button input interrupt process is executed in parallel with the sub-control circuit main process, for example, every 1 ms by updating the measurement timer. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an input signal from the effect button switch 230 (S221). If there is an input signal from the effect button switch 230, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S222. If there is no input signal from the effect button switch 230, the sub CPU 201 ends the button input interrupt process.

  In S222, the sub CPU 201 determines an operation state of the effect button 23 based on an input signal from the effect button switch 230, and generates information indicating the operation state. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the button input interrupt process.

[Operating means input processing]
FIG. 64 shows operation means input processing by the sub CPU 201. The operation means input process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 acquires an operation state based on information indicating the operation state (S231). The operation state includes the number of times of pressing for the effect button 23, and includes the rotation direction and angle, and the rotation speed for the jog dial 24. The effect is determined according to the operation state. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the operation means input process.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 65 shows command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 71), the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (S241).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (S242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data is present when the command is received, and that the data is free from errors or missing.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all matters relating to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of production (whether there is a serif notice or the presence of the SU notice) as the production pattern. The content of the effect (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) that is selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information in another process that is made into a separate subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub lottery process, and then the effect content executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by an effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command transmission processing]
FIG. 66 shows command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 205 to 208 (S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for generating a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained by the effect mode determination process and temporarily storing the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a directory table registration process (S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a corresponding directory table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message and effect information stored in the directory buffer. The directory table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes message transmission processing (S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of reading a message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table and transmitting the message to a predetermined control circuit 205 to 208. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 67 shows message setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets a device (control circuits 205 to 208) to transmit based on the effect information (S261).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting the presence or absence of system operation (S262).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs setting of stage information and each effect information (S263).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (S264). Thereby, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuit 205 to 208) as a transmission destination, presence / absence of system operation, stage information, production information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Direction table registration processing]
FIG. 68 shows a directory table registration process by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (S271).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (S272).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a slave table used in the master table (S273).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering the directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as a slave table (S274). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration process.

[Message transmission processing]
FIG. 69 shows message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the directory buffer corresponding to the directory table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 205 to 208) according to the “destination device” set in the message. Is transmitted (S281).

  Next, after the message transmission is completed, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for discarding unnecessary directory tables (S282). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[Produce control processing during probability change]
FIG. 70 shows an effect control process during probability change by the sub CPU 201. The probable-change effect control process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to determine the effect mode in the probability change game state when the effect mode determination process is executed. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation flag is “1” (S291). The value of the probability variation flag can be determined based on the stored / gaming state data transmitted from the main control circuit 70. When the value of the probability variation flag is “1”, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S292. If the value of the probability change flag is not “1”, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect control processing during probability change.

  In S292, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of changes after the big hit is 99 or less. The number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit is counted by accumulating the counter with the number of receptions as the number of fluctuations every time a special symbol effect start command is received upon receipt of the special symbol end display command. If the number of fluctuations after the big hit is 99 or less, the sub CPU 201 determines “high time” or “high time”, and proceeds to the processing of S293. If the number of changes after the big hit is not 99 or less, but 100 or more, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S294.

  In S293, the sub CPU 201 executes a story & battle effect selection process. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect control process during probability change. The story & battle effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the story effect and battle effect, and the related major role straddling effect will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the story effect is an image display effect that can be executed during the period from 1 to 20 times after the jackpot is ended (story effect section corresponding to high time), and the main character is the motif. A video with a narrative storyline is displayed. The battle effect is a video display effect that can be executed during the period from the end of the story effect until the number of fluctuations is 99 (mainly the battle effect section corresponding to high times). In the following, an image showing winning and losing (in this embodiment, “defeat” in the case of winning) is displayed as a result of confrontation with “boss”.

  The story production is prepared as video data from the first episode to the predetermined final episode, such as story production 1, 2, 3,..., And a unit of time (for example, 25 s) determined in advance for each story. To be executed. Such a story effect always ends before the change of the decorative symbol (special symbol) ends (stops) at the 20th variation. For example, as shown in FIG. 85, the story effect may end at the fifteenth variation. In this case, the story effect ends during the fifteenth variation, and transitions to the battle effect at the start of the next sixteenth variation, so the video that is being prepared for battle until the fifteenth variation ends. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the battle effect is prepared as video data in which predetermined bosses 1, 2, 3,... Corresponding to a plurality of stages to be described later appear from the next fluctuation after the end of the story effect. . For example, if a battle effect is performed that defeats the boss 1 in a confrontation with the boss 1 after the story effect 1 ends, the story effect 2 is executed after the next jackpot ends, and after the story effect 2 ends, the boss 2 When a battle production is performed that defeats the boss 2 in a confrontation, the story production 1 is executed until all the predetermined bosses are finally defeated. A battle effect corresponding to 2, 3,... Is repeatedly executed. In battle production, various enemy characters appear in addition to the specified boss, while in the story production, the specified boss appearing on the corresponding stage is always introduced, and it is determined separately from the enemy character. Unless the boss is defeated, story productions 1, 2, 3, and so on will not progress. Therefore, for example, when a big hit is made without destroying the boss in the battle production, the battle production may be executed again after becoming the battle production section after the big hit. As a result, if the story production is not executed after the hit and the battle production section is reached, or the story production is finished at the 15th time and the battle production section is started from the 16th time, as described above, The battle effect will be executed before the number of fluctuations is performed 20 times from the end of the hit. Therefore, in the “high order”, it is possible to execute a battle effect based on the selected variation pattern. In other words, the battle effect can be executed even when the variation time of the variation pattern selected from the table corresponding to the “high time” is shorter than the variation time of the variation pattern selected from the table corresponding to the “high time”. There is also a production like this.

  In this embodiment, if a power interruption occurs during the execution of the story effect, the battle effect starts after the power interruption return.For example, after the power interruption recovery, the same boss as before the power interruption occurrence appears. The content of the story production itself may be advanced on the condition of When the content of the production progresses, in addition to the case where the executed story production is changed from the first episode to the second episode, for example, the opponent's character changes with respect to the hero character, or the mission achievement difficulty level is higher. This means that the stage of the production changes depending on the character switching, background switching, or sound switching, including the case of changing from easy to normal or hard. In the present embodiment, when all the variation patterns of the special symbol in the story effect section correspond to the loss, it is assumed that the variation pattern type is “ST normal variation” and the shortest variation time is 1.3 s. As a result, the story effect section is defined as a period corresponding to at least 20 × 1.3 = 26 (s). Thereby, the story production is controlled so as to end in a time (production time) of about 25 s at the longest. However, the story effect is not limited to the effect time described above, and the effect time may be defined according to the longest variation time. Further, if the production time cannot be ended in the story production section, the story production may be forcibly terminated, or a part of the battle production section may be assigned to the story production. Further, in the present embodiment, the story effect and the battle effect are uniquely associated with any one of a plurality of stages that determine the effect scene and the situation, and each stage and a predetermined boss 1, 2 to be destroyed. 3,... Are uniquely associated. The plurality of stages are classified into a normal stage and a specific stage, and when all the story productions are executed and all the battle productions that defeat a predetermined boss are executed, the player operates the operation means (production button 23 and the like). It is possible to select a stage using. The stage selection may be possible during a big hit (may include a big hit start interval and a big hit end interpal), or at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, During the demonstration display, it may be possible during a period in which no change is made), or may be possible at any timing during the normal gaming state or ST, for example, in response to an input of a password or the like.

  Also, basically, the battle effect that destroys a given boss is executed as an effect corresponding to a specific jackpot in the promiscuous short game state, and when the battle effect is executed, the story effect progresses, but as an exception In a specific gaming state, a story may progress only when a specific variation pattern is selected and a specific performance pattern is selected. For example, the “Battle Reach” of the effect pattern corresponding to the hit corresponds to the battle effect that defeats a predetermined boss, but the content of the effect executed when the latter half variation pattern is “16H” and the latter half variation pattern is “1AH”. The production contents executed in the case of "" are the same. Therefore, when the battle effect corresponding to the “battle reach” is executed, whether it is a probabilistic and short-time gaming state (“high”) or a probable and non-time-saving gaming state (“latency”), There is a possibility of progress as a story production. On the other hand, in the probabilistic and short-time gaming state (“high”), “19H” is selected as the second half variation pattern, and among the performance patterns that can be executed according to the second half variation pattern, a specific that is different from the battle performance Only when the production pattern is executed, there is a possibility that the story production will proceed. As such a specific effect pattern, a later-described prominent straddle effect corresponds. In addition, regarding the period of “latent”, a so-called latent zone may be a latent production section (third production mode) different from the story production section (first production mode) and the battle production section (second production mode). In addition to performing the same effect as the battle effect section as described above, a specific effect that is not executed in the battle effect section may be executed. Further, in order to show that the latent production section is clearly different from the battle production section, in the latent production section, for example, a pair of left and right movable units 81A and 81B are adjacent, combined, and drawn so as to draw a circle on the front surface of the display area 13a. Alternatively, the decorative symbols are variably displayed at the center of the circle formed by the movable units 81A and 81B while being linked, and in the battle effect section, the movable units 81A and 81B are decorated with the display area 13a in the normal state in the standby position. You may make it display a pattern variably. Also, in both the battle effect section and the latent effect section corresponding to “latent”, the battle effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the battle effect is executed only in the battle effect section. You may do it.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the protagonist straddling effect is an effect associated with the effect executed during the hit variation, and is an image display effect that can also be executed during the big hit. As shown in the figure, in the effects related to normal boss destruction (including battle effects), a re-lottery effect is executed after the boss is defeated by the battle effect, and as a result, the start of the big hit is clearly indicated according to the big hit start interval. A big hit start video is displayed, and then an effect corresponding to the big hit is executed. The re-lottery effect means an effect suggesting the possibility of changing a numerical symbol (for example, 444) once displayed as a decorative symbol on the display screen to a different numerical symbol (for example, 777). On the other hand, in the striking role director, the re-lottery effect, the big hit start video, and the big hit effect are not displayed, and regardless of the big hit start interval or the big hit, the video after winning or losing through the battle direction (from the boss defeat) A video showing the situation after that) is displayed. When the video related to such a big game straddling effect is displayed, the player has an impression as if the big hit suddenly started. However, in reality, there are announcement displays that prompt right-handed strikes and display effects of decorative symbols that are aligned with numeric symbols, so the player can detect the start of a big hit by visually checking these displays. In the striking role, it does not mean that the big hit is not displayed at all. In addition, during execution of the protagonist striking effect, the display effect of the decorative symbol that has the same number of symbols may be prevented from being displayed or the notification display that prompts the user to make a right-hand shot may not be displayed. In this case, it can be notified that it is a big hit separately by an LED or a 7-segment display.

  Referring to FIG. 70 again, in S294, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the big hit is exactly 100 times. When the number of fluctuations after the big hit is 100, the sub CPU 201 determines “highest final” and proceeds to the process of S295. When the number of changes after the big hit is not 100 but 101 or more, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S296.

  In step S <b> 295, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for controlling the operation related to the ST final variation effect according to “highest time final”. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect control process during probability change.

  In S296, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the big hit is 101 or more and 123 or less. When the number of fluctuations after the big hit is 101 times or more and 123 times or less, the sub CPU 201 determines “latent” and proceeds to the process of S297. When the number of fluctuations after the big hit is not 123 times or less and 124 times or more, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S298.

  In step S <b> 297, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of controlling an operation related to the during-latency effect corresponding to “latency”. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect control process during probability change.

  In S298, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit is exactly 124 times. If the number of changes after the big hit is 124, the sub CPU 201 determines “latent last” and proceeds to the process of S299. When the number of fluctuations after the big hit is not 124 but 125 or more, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect change control process during probability change.

  In step S <b> 299, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of controlling an operation related to the effect for final variation during the latent in accordance with “latent final”. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect control process during probability change. In the present embodiment, control is performed so as to vary the production to be selected according to the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the table and special symbols referred to by the main CPU 71 are controlled. You may make it change production according to the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation. In addition, since the main CPU 71 narrows down (selects) the variation pattern, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern and an effect content according to the variation pattern without determining the number of variations after the big hit. Also good. In particular, since the ST final variation effect and the in-latency final variation effect are selected based on one effect pattern corresponding to when the variation pattern hits or loses, the sub CPU 201 changes after the big hit ends. Although it is possible to execute the effect even if the number of times is not recognized, the number of variations after the end of the big hit and a specific variation pattern corresponding to the ST final variation effect or the latent variation final variation effect are received. The error determination may be performed by determining whether or not it is a correct timing to receive such a specific variation pattern based on the timing to perform the normal operation. According to such error determination, the sub CPU 201 can recognize an abnormality that a specific variation pattern is not transmitted at a specific timing.

[Story & Battle production selection process]
FIG. 71 shows a story & battle effect selection process by the sub CPU 201. The story & battle effect selection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the effect change effect control process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a story effect is already being executed (S301). If the story effect is already being executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S306. If the story effect is not being executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S302.

  In S302, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state) has shifted to the probability changing gaming state through a big hit. That is, it is determined whether it is a so-called first hit V hit or a V hit in the villa. In the case where the normal gaming state has shifted to the probability-changing gaming state (in the case of the first V winning jackpot), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the processing of S303. If it is not the state that has shifted from the normal gaming state to the probability-changing gaming state (in the case of a V-probability hit in consecutive resorts), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the processing of S309.

  In step S303, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting the first story effect.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting “0” to the boss destruction flag (S304). The boss defeat flag indicates whether or not a predetermined boss has been defeated in the battle effect. “1” indicates defeat of the predetermined boss and “0” indicates defeat. Defeat includes not only the failure to destroy a predetermined boss but also a confrontation with an enemy character other than the specified predetermined boss.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a stage related to the story effect and the battle effect (S305). That is, either the normal stage or the specific stage corresponding to the story effect is selected. Each stage has a predetermined boss associated with it, and the story production progresses by defeating the predetermined boss corresponding to one stage. In addition, although it is desirable that the order in which each story effect is executed is determined in advance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the story effect to be executed may be selected by lottery. In this embodiment, the stage and boss corresponding to the story effect are selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the story effect and stage corresponding to the boss may be selected after selecting the boss first. Then, other effect elements may be selected based on any effect element. In the present embodiment, the story production, the stage, and the boss to be defeated correspond to each other. For example, the same stage exists for two different bosses, or two different stories. There may be cases where the same boss or stage exists for the production.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting other effects to be simultaneously advanced during execution of the story effect (S306). As other effects, there are a variation effect pattern of numerical symbols, an effect pattern at the time of reach, an effect pattern related to a so-called pre-reading notice, an effect pattern related to a pending change, and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to end the story effect during the change (S307). The fluctuation means a fluctuation at the time when the number of fluctuations is determined. When the story effect is ended during the change, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S308. When the story effect is not ended during the change, the sub CPU 201 ends the story & battle effect selection process. Since the story effect is controlled in units of time, there is a possibility that the story effect will be executed over a plurality of times of change, and an effect to be executed during the change must be selected before the start of each change. Therefore, by performing the above-described determination during the change, it is possible to determine whether or not to end the story effect during the change display even if the change display is started.

  In step S308, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of displaying a video image during battle preparation only during the change after the story effect is ended during the change (S308). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the story & battle effect selection process. In addition, it is desirable that the symbol variation when displaying the image during the battle preparation is an out-of-sequence variation, but not limited to this, in the case of displaying the image during the battle preparation for the per symbol variation, You may make it perform the production | presentation display which shows a win after displaying once the battle preparation.

  In step S309, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the boss destruction flag is “1”. When the boss destruction flag is “1”, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S310. When the boss destruction flag is “0” instead of “1”, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S311. That is, if the story production is finished and the battle is being prepared, or if the battle production is executed in the previous probability variation game state but the boss is not defeated, the sub CPU 201 passes the predetermined number of fluctuations after the big hit is finished. Or immediately after the big hit, the battle production will be advanced as a battle production section.

  In step S <b> 310, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a story effect to proceed next in order to advance the story effect according to the boss defeat. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S304.

  In S311, the sub CPU 201 executes a battle effect selection process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the story & battle effect selection process.

[Battle production selection process]
FIG. 72 shows battle effect selection processing by the sub CPU 201. The battle effect selection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described story & battle effect selection process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a battle effect according to the stage (S321). However, since the stage is selected according to the story effect, the stage is not changed when the story effect does not proceed. In other words, in this embodiment, the stage is not changed unless the boss to be defeated is changed, and therefore, the stage before and after the big hit ends may be the same even if the big hit is won.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the latter half fluctuation pattern is “16H” or “1AH” (S322). That is, it is determined whether or not a “battle reach” battle effect corresponding to the hit of “high” or “latency” has been selected. When the second half variation pattern is “16H” or “1AH”, the sub CPU 201 determines that the “battle reach” battle effect corresponding to the winning is selected, and proceeds to the process of S323. When the latter half variation pattern is neither “16H” nor “1AH”, the sub CPU 201 determines that a battle effect other than “battle reach” corresponding to the winning is selected, and proceeds to the process of S326.

  In step S <b> 323, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute a battle effect for destroying the boss corresponding to the stage. That is, the sub CPU 201 executes a battle effect to destroy a predetermined boss by lottery using the effect pattern determination table for the normal stage shown in FIG. 44, or battles with an enemy character other than the predetermined boss. Decide whether to perform the production. When executing the battle effect of boss destruction, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S324. When executing the battle effect of confronting other enemy characters without executing the battle effect of destroying the boss, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S325.

  In step S324, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting “1” in the boss destruction flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the battle effect selection process.

  In step S325, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting “0” in the boss destruction flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the battle effect selection process.

  In S326, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the latter half fluctuation pattern is “19H”. That is, it is determined whether or not the battle effect “Restoration after defeating ST Battle” corresponding to the winning is selected. When the second half variation pattern is “19H”, the sub CPU 201 determines that the battle effect “Restoration after defeating ST Battle” corresponding to the winning is selected, and proceeds to the process of S327. When the second half variation pattern is not “19H”, the sub CPU 201 determines a battle effect other than “Restoration after defeat of ST Battle” or “Battle Reach” corresponding to the hit, that is, a battle effect in which a defeat that cannot defeat a predetermined boss is determined. Is selected, and the process proceeds to S330.

  In S327, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a specific stage is selected as the current stage. When the specific stage is selected, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S328. When the specific stage is not selected and the normal stage is selected, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S323.

  In step S328, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the striking role effect instead of the battle effect of “Restoring after ST Battle Defeat” by lottery using the effect pattern determination table for the specific stage shown in FIG. . In the case of executing the protagonist straddling effect, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S329. When executing the battle effect of “resurrection after defeating ST battle” without executing the straddle effect, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S323.

  In step S329, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting “1” in the boss destruction flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the battle effect selection process. In the case of the battle effect “Restoration after defeating ST Battle”, “1” is set to the boss destruction flag to finally destroy the boss.

  In S330, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting “0” to the boss destruction flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the battle effect selection process.

[Interface preview setting process]
FIG. 73 shows interface notice setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The interface notice setting process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to determine the contents of the interface notice described later as the effect mode when executing the effect mode determination process.

  Here, the interface notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the interface preview is an effect included in a story effect or the like that mainly displays the contents of a story effect (story introduction) or a text message for introducing a character in the display area 13a. is there. For example, in the display area 13a, the decorative symbol 1000 is basically displayed in a variable manner or stopped at the center, and a reserved image 1010 indicating the number of reserved start prizes is displayed in the lower left portion. Are displayed in the message display area 1020 at the lower right. For example, story introduction content is displayed as a text message in the message display area 1020. In addition, an image such as a story effect is displayed in the remaining area 1030 including the background of the decorative pattern 1000 and the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (b) and 88 (c), when a text message of the story introduction content is displayed in the message display area 1020 while the decorative symbol 1000 is being displayed in a variable manner, the foreground of the message display area 1020 is displayed. As an effect accompanied by the moving image display, a shutter image 1040 that opens the shutter as shown in (d) and (e) of FIG. It may be displayed. In such a case, there is a possibility that “chance presentation” is performed as an interface preview. In the chance effect, when the shutter image 1040 is displayed in the closed state, the text message being displayed in the message display area 1020 is gradually made invisible as shown in (b) and (c) of FIG. . That is, when the shutter image 1040 is displayed, the text message is obscured even if the text message of the story introduction content is being displayed while the story effect is being executed. Thereafter, as shown in (d) and (e) of the figure, when the shutter image 1040 is displayed in the open state, the message display area 1020 temporarily displays “chance” (or instead of the story introduction content) (or For example, a text message such as “Intense fever” is displayed. Such a chance effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit or the degree of expectation (reliability) of a probable entry, and the possibility of execution is determined according to the fluctuation pattern, and the chance effect is executed. This increases the player's expectation for big hits and odds. The chance effect can be executed regardless of whether the story effect relating to the video display is being executed.

  As shown as an example in FIG. 89 (a), the interface announcement related to the story introduction includes a case where there is no shutter movable pattern and a case where there is a shutter movable pattern in which the shutter image 1040 appears. When there is no shutter movable pattern, the text messages corresponding to the story introduction contents 1, 2,... In order are displayed in the message display area 1020 at the timing when the variation display of the decorative pattern 1000 starts. On the other hand, when there is a shutter movable pattern, similarly, the text messages corresponding to the order of story introduction contents 1, 2,... Are sequentially displayed in the message display area 1020 at the timing when the variation display of the decorative symbol 1000 starts. Even when the decorative symbol 1000 is being displayed in a variable manner and the story introduction content is being displayed in the message display area 1020, the shutter image 1040 appears due to the movement of the shutter, and the display of the story introduction content is temporarily suspended. When the shutter image 1040 disappears, a text message such as “chance” is temporarily displayed in the message display area 1020 in place of the story introduction content.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (b), for example, 50s is defined as the display time per time in the interface preview related to the story introduction, and the contents of the story introduction multiple times are specified for each set. For example, when the story introduction contents 1 to 5 of the set 1 are sequentially displayed as the executable number of times for a predetermined display time over 5 times, the story introduction set to be executed from the start of the next variable display is selected by lottery. The number of times the story introduction content can be executed is set in a subtraction counter, and is counted until the value of the subtraction counter becomes zero. Whether or not to produce the shutter movable pattern effect is determined by lottery other than the story introduction set lottery, including the execution timing. When the shutter image 1040 appears due to the shutter movable pattern, the next story introduction content is displayed in the message display area 1020 from the start of the next variable display after the shutter image 1040 disappears. In this case, the display time per story introduction content changes. Although not shown in particular, the interface announcement relating to the character introduction has a display time of, for example, 30 s, and it is determined by lottery for each category whether or not it is executed once at the timing when the decorative symbol 1000 starts to be displayed. It has come to be.

  Referring again to FIG. 73, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the interface notice by lottery (already being executed) based on the variation pattern from the main control circuit 70, the winning lottery result, and the like. (S341). When the interface notice is executed or is already being executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S342. When the interface notice is not executed during execution, the sub CPU 201 ends the interface notice setting process.

  In step S <b> 342, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it is an interface notice related to the story introduction. In the case of the interface preview related to the story introduction, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S343. If it is not the interface preview related to the story introduction, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S352.

  In step S343, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the story introduction can be executed is zero. When the executable count is 0, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S344. When the number of executions is not 0 but 1 or more, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S350.

  In S344, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of drawing lots of story introduction contents to be executed in units of one set. For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the set 1 is obtained as the lottery result, the story introduction contents 1 to 5 are determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting “5” in the subtraction counter as the number of times the story introduction can be executed (S345).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting the story introduction content to be executed at the present time (S346). Thus, the selected story introduction content is displayed in the message display area 1020 in response to the start of variable display.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting a display time (story introduction time) defined for one story introduction in a timer (S347).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the subtraction counter as the number of times the story introduction can be executed (S348).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a chance effect setting process (S349). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the interface notice setting process.

  In S350, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the story introduction time has elapsed based on the value of the timer. If the story introduction time has elapsed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S346 and performs a process of selecting the story introduction content to be executed next. If the story introduction time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S351.

  In step S <b> 351, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the shutter movable flag is “1”. The shutter movable flag is a flag indicating the presence / absence of a shutter movable pattern, and is set to “1” when a chance effect using the shutter movable pattern is executed. When the shutter movable flag is “1”, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S346 and performs a process of selecting the story introduction content accompanied by the shutter movable pattern. When the shutter movable flag is not “1”, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S349.

  In step S <b> 352, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it is an interface notice related to character introduction. In the case of the interface preview related to the character introduction, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S353. If it is not the interface notice related to the character introduction, the process proceeds to S349.

  In step S <b> 353, the sub CPU 201 performs a process for lottery of the character introduction content to be executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the character introduction content obtained as a lottery result (S354). As a result, the set character introduction content is displayed in the message display area 1020 on a single basis in response to the start of variable display. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S349. In other words, the interface notice relating to the character introduction ends after a predetermined display time or ends with the execution of the chance effect.

[Chance production setting process]
FIG. 74 shows a chance effect setting process performed by the sub CPU 201. The chance effect setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the interface notice setting process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the chance effect by lottery based on the variation pattern from the main control circuit 70, the winning lottery result, and the like (S361). When executing the chance effect, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S362. When the chance effect is not executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S366.

  In step S362, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting “1” to the shutter movable flag.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the story effect relating to the video display is being executed at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols (S363). When the story effect is being executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S365. If the story effect is not being executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S364.

  In S364, the sub CPU 201 selects a chance effect table (A pattern) shown in FIG. 42, and an effect pattern capable of executing a moving image display in which the shutter image 1040 appears at a relatively late stage within the variation time based on this table. (For example, normal variation effect B) is selected. As a result, when the story effect is not executed, the chance effect is executed at a relatively late timing after the decorative symbol starts to be displayed so that the shutter image 1040 does not appear as suddenly as possible. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the chance effect setting process.

  In S365, the sub CPU 201 selects the chance effect table (B pattern) shown in FIG. 42, and based on this table, an effect pattern capable of executing a moving image display in which the shutter image 1040 appears at a relatively early stage within the variation time. (For example, normal variation effect C) may be selected. As a result, when a story introduction interface announcement is executed together with a story effect, the chance effect is executed so that the shutter image 1040 appears at a relatively early timing after the decorative symbol starts to change. There is. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the chance effect setting process.

  In step S <b> 366, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting “0” to the shutter movable flag since the shutter image 1040 does not appear without executing the chance effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the chance effect setting process.

[Pseudo-continuous effect determination process]
FIG. 75 shows a pseudo-continuous effect determination process by the sub CPU 201. The pseudo-continuous effect determination process is a subroutine included in the above-described effect mode determination process of S205, and is called to determine the pseudo-continuous effect mode when executing the effect mode determination process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute a normal pseudo-ream by lottery based on the first half variation pattern (S371). When executing the normal pseudo-ream, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S372. When the normal pseudo-ream is not executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S374.

  In S372, the sub CPU 201 executes normal pseudo-continuous effect setting processing. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S373.

  In step S373, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting a reach effect according to the latter half variation pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the pseudo-continuous effect determination process.

  In S374, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the high-speed pseudo-ream by lottery based on the first half variation pattern. When executing the high speed pseudo-ream, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S375. If the normal pseudo-ream is not executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S376.

  In step S375, the sub CPU 201 executes a high-speed simulated continuous effect setting process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S373.

  In step S376, the sub CPU 201 executes other effect setting processing other than the pseudo-ream. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the pseudo-continuous effect determination process.

[Normal pseudo-continuous effect setting processing]
FIG. 76 shows normal pseudo-continuous effect setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The normal pseudo-continuous effect setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described pseudo continuous effect determining process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the number of pseudo consecutive times according to the first half variation pattern (S381). In this case, the normal continuous number of times is selected from 1 to 4 times. Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting normal pseudo-continuous effect contents according to the selected number of pseudo-continuous operations (S382). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the normal pseudo-continuous effect setting process.

[High-speed simulated continuous effect setting processing]
FIG. 77 shows high-speed simulated continuous effect setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The high-speed simulated continuous effect setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the pseudo continuous effect determination process described above.

  Here, the promotion lottery performed in order to change the background color of the video during the execution of the pseudo-series will be described with reference to FIG. 90, and the operation timing of the production related to the pseudo-series will be described with reference to FIG. explain.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the present embodiment, a promotion lottery is performed to change the background color of the video at the time of pseudo-running, and tables (1) to (5) are basically used in this promotion lottery. It is configured as follows. Tables (1) to (5) define a background color that changes next according to the background color staying at the present time and a random number range (not shown) as a lottery condition. As the background color changes from “blue” → “green” → “red” → “gold” → “rainbow”, it indicates that the degree of expectation of jackpot is larger. For example, when the background color staying at the present time is “blue”, the background color to be changed next from “blue” is determined by the promotion lottery by referring to the table (1), and the background color staying at the current time is “green” In the case of “,” the background color that changes from “green” by referring to the table (2) is determined by the promotion lottery, and the higher-level table is used step by step each time the background color change is determined. In each of the tables (1) to (5), a random number range is defined such that the lottery probability becomes smaller toward the right side of the horizontal axis. Further, the probability that the background color changes to “rainbow” having the highest expectation degree of big hits differs depending on whether or not the fluctuation pattern at the time of executing the high-speed pseudo-continuous corresponds to big hits. For example, in the case of a big hit, “rainbow” may be selected as the background color, but in the case of a loss, each table (1) to (5) is set so that there is no possibility of selecting “rainbow”. The random number range is defined. As a result, in the case of detachment, the first half variation pattern of “pseudo 4” is not selected as the quasi-continuous.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 90B as an example, the case of 20 pseudo-continuations, the promotion lottery for determining whether to change the background color is executed in reverse order from the final background color (final color). . For example, in the example shown in FIG. 90B, when the final color is “rainbow” and, for example, “go to gold” is obtained as a result of the promotion lottery as the background color change, Stay background is "Fri". Similarly, when the stay background is “gold”, for example, “red” as the background color change is obtained as a result of the promotion lottery, the stay background at the stage immediately before that stage becomes “red”, and the stay background When, for example, “to blue” is obtained as a background color change at the stage where the background is “red” as a result of the promotion lottery, the stay background at the stage immediately before that stage becomes “blue”. Thus, the background color to be displayed first from the final color is sequentially determined by the promotion lottery. In the case of the high-speed pseudo-ream, a background color change can occur at least when the re-change is relatively short 3.5 s, but the background color change may not occur when the re-change is relatively long 7 s. A background color change may occur.

  As described above, since the promotion lottery for changing the background color is performed so as to be sequentially determined from the final color, the table obtained by converting the tables (1) to (5) as shown in FIG. It has come to be referenced. In the table shown in FIG. 90 (c), it is defined that the selection probability decreases as the color changes from “no change” to the lower stage. In such a promotion lottery, the winning probability may be increased as the number of pseudo-continuations increases. In addition, a color that is easily changed by changing the winning probability according to the stage of the pseudo-ream or the number of the stages and the number of pseudo-reams may be provided. As the background color change pattern, for example, when changing from “red” to “rainbow”, the big hit expectation is higher than when changing from “gold” to “rainbow”. In the promotion lottery, for example, when staying at a rainbow background, a probability that “to red” or the like is more likely to be selected than “to gold” may be specified. In addition, as described above, in the promotion lottery, the production is determined in reverse order from the final color. Therefore, for example, when the promotion lottery “to gold” is won, “gold → rainbow” in the table (4) This is synonymous with the selection of the production. At this time, since the lottery method of the production is reverse order, it is possible to express that winning the lottery “to gold” from the final color can be expressed as winning the relegation lottery. Can also be expressed such that the contents of the effect are set as a result of performing the promotion lottery with the corresponding effect. In addition, since the final color is determined in reverse order, the first color of the effect differs depending on the promotion lottery (or demote lottery) of the effect, and even when the final color is the same, for example, the color at the start of the high-speed pseudo-ream is randomly determined, The range of production is wide and rich in diversity, and it can enhance the interest of players.

  As shown in FIG. 91, as the pseudo-series, a high-speed pseudo-series, a normal pseudo-series, and a post-reach pseudo-series (special pseudo-series) are provided. The high-speed quasi-ream is a quasi-ream where the decorative symbol's variable display and temporary stop display are repeatedly performed more times than the normal quasi-ream. It starts immediately after the start of the variable display and may lead to direct super reach. It has become. The normal pseudo-ream is a pseudo-ream in which the decorative symbol variation display and temporary stop display are repeatedly performed 1 to 4 times, and is started immediately after the variation display start, and is connected to the super reach through the normal reach. The post-reach pseudo-ream is a pseudo-ream that is executed at a different timing from the high-speed pseudo-ream and the normal pseudo-ream, and starts after reaching the start of the decorative symbol display, and then the normal reach and then the super-reach. It is like that.

  As shown in FIG. 91 as an example, the execution time of the high-speed pseudo-ream is not limited to the time defined in the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation time), and may be continued over the first half fluctuation time. After completing the high-speed quasi-continuation, it will evolve into normal reach and super reach, so by providing a period of fluctuation of the decorative pattern that will be described later, it will match the timing of development to normal reach and super reach after the end of the normal quasi-continuation. ing. As a result, it is possible to share effects related to variations in decorative symbols such as normal reach and super reach, which are executed after the end of each pseudo series, such as a normal pseudo series, a high speed pseudo series, and a post-reach pseudo series. The load related to the display process can be reduced.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting the number of pseudo consecutive times by lottery (S391). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 determines 8 times (A) or (B) as the high speed pseudo-ream, for example, when 8 times is selected as the number of high-speed pseudo reams. As shown in FIG. 45, in the high-speed pseudo-ream 8 times (A), it is stipulated that the 3.5-second pseudo-ream is performed 8 times (including the time to reach), and the high-speed pseudo-ream 8 times (B) stipulates that the 3.5-second pseudo-ream is performed 6 times (including the time to reach) and the 7-second pseudo-ream is performed twice. Here, the effect related to the 3.5 second (development) pseudo-ream is to display a “reach eye” after a fluctuation of 3.5 seconds. In addition, when the quasi-ream is set to 8 times, the reach mode is also taken into consideration. Therefore, except for the reach mode, it can be said that the number of temporary stops as the quasi-ream is 7 times. And then the reach mode may be displayed. In this case, as an effect related to the 3.5 second (development) quasi-ream, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after the variation of 3.5 seconds, and then the variation is displayed again. "Is considered to be displayed. In addition, it is possible to select the number of pseudo-continuations that can be executed within the time obtained by subtracting the time required for SP reach (super reach) from one fluctuation time, but in this embodiment, 3.5 seconds and 7 seconds. Is defined in advance (see FIG. 45). Further, in this embodiment, for example, the 7-second pseudo-ream is executed after continuously executing 3.5 seconds twice or more so that the 7-second high-speed pseudo-ream does not continue. Without being limited thereto, a high-speed pseudo sequence of 7 seconds may be continuously executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a color to be finally displayed (background final color) as a background color (S392). That is, in this process, the background final color is determined in advance prior to the background color change promotion lottery using the tables (1) to (5) in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a background color change of each scenario based on the background final color by promotion lottery using the tables (1) to (5) in FIG. 91 (S393). This process is performed to change the background color only when the high-speed pseudo-ream is 3.5 seconds.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a temporary stop pattern of the decorative symbols at the time of the pseudo continuous execution (S394).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped during the execution of the pseudo-series (S395).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting the fluctuation fluctuation time according to the time until reach development (S396). Basically, the fluctuation time is preferably shorter than the shortest time of 3.5 seconds of the high-speed pseudo-ream, but is not particularly limited in this embodiment. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the high-speed simulated continuous effect setting process. In addition, if the above-mentioned method is used, a variation can be provided in the effect mode of the pseudo-continuous in the fluctuation time by combining the pseudo-continuous effect of 3.5 seconds and 7 seconds. In particular, in the 7-second pseudo-continuous production, after performing the reach production and after performing the pseudo-continuous production with the reach production (actual that does not actually reach but once the reach production is shown, the pseudo-continuation is continued) It is possible to perform a temporary stop display effect, and in the case of a 3.5 second pseudo-continuous effect, there is a possibility of color change, and the role varies depending on the time of each pseudo-continuous effect The effect of production can also be enhanced. In the present embodiment, when a 7-second pseudo-continuous effect is implemented, it is difficult to determine whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect continues thereafter, and a reach effect is executed with a 3.5-second pseudo-continuous effect. In such a case, since there is no possibility of a pseudo-continuous production accompanied by a reach production, reach (reach production) is decided and development or transition to production such as normal reach or super reach is decided.

[V effect setting processing]
FIG. 78 shows a V effect setting process performed by the sub CPU 201. The V effect setting process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determining process of S205 described above, and is called to determine the effect mode related to the V prize when executing the effect mode determining process.

  Here, the effects related to the V prize will be described with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the effects related to the V prize are a series of operations from the winning of the small hit or the big win that the second big prize opening (V attacker) 54 opens to the V winning failure or the V winning success (big hit big hit). This is the production. As shown in the figure, after the timing 1 of the small win or the big win, the corresponding effect is executed at the timing 2 at which the V attacker (second big prize opening 54) is first opened. At this time, internally, the sub CPU 201 recognizes that it corresponds to the 1R of the small hit or the big hit, but the effect contents at the timing 2 are the same.

  Next, after the timing 3 at which a V-attacker can be won, at the timing 4 at the time of small win, the V-velocity (displacement member 39) is in a position at which V winning is not possible, while at the same timing 4 at the time of big hit Is in a position where V Bello can win V. After that, at the timing 5 at the time of small hit, the V prize will fail, whereas at the timing 5 at the big hit, the V prize will be almost successful. As a result, at the timing 6 at the time of a small hit, an effect indicating that the V prize has failed is executed, while at the timing 6 at the time of a big hit, an effect of a major player is executed. The big director effect is an effect that indicates the start of a big hit.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a so-called V-accuracy ST machine. If a V win is made during a big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is changed to a probabilistic gaming state. V wins are possible, and winning a V will start a big win. As described above, the V-accuracy ST machine and the first and second type mixers are configured to realize different game characteristics. Therefore, in this embodiment, by adjusting the generation timing of the opening mode and the production mode of the V attacker (second big prize opening), by performing the production to indicate the start of the big hit corresponding to the big win winning at the time of the V prize The effect is as if it were a V-type ST machine, but as if it were a 1 or 2 type mixer.

  FIG. 93 shows an operation pattern related to the V winning at the big hit and the small hit. T1 to T6 correspond to the timings 1 to 6 described above. As shown in the figure, at the time of big hit, when the first V attacker (second big prize opening 54) in the first round is opened, the V bell (displacement member 39) is also opened at the same time. Because of the extremely short time of .1 s, it is difficult to win V at this time. Thereafter, when the V attacker is released for the second time in the first round, the V-velocity is in an open state for a time T4 that is relatively longer than the previous open time. Thereafter, the big role effect is executed at time T6 corresponding to the interval between rounds.

  On the other hand, even at the time of a small hit, when the first V attacker (second big prize opening 54) is opened, the V tongue (displacement member 39) is also opened at the same time, but the opening time is extremely short, for example 0.1s. Therefore, it is difficult to win V at this time. Thereafter, when the second V-attacker is released as the small hitting opening pattern, the V-velocity is closed, and after the V-attacker is closed, the V-velocity is opened for a period of T4. As a result, in the time of T4 at the time of the small hit, it is difficult to win the V attacker in the first place, so the V winning will fail at this time. Thereafter, the effect of V winning failure is executed for a time T6 corresponding to the interval between rounds at the time of big hit.

  The effect related to the V winning success at the timing of T5 is actually executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, but the effect related to the V winning failure is set to be V winning possible at the big hit. It will be executed immediately after the time T4 has elapsed. At the time of T6, an effect such as a big game effect indicating the start of a big hit or a V prize winning failure is executed, but not limited to this, the big game effect may be continued after the second round. In this embodiment, it is difficult to win a V during a small hit, and at the end of the small hit, there is no transition to a gaming state that is more advantageous than the gaming state before winning the small hit. Also, in the case of a big hit, the V-attacker will be open in the second round following the first round, but in the case of a small hit there is no concept of a round and it will be open only up to 1.8 seconds throughout. In this embodiment, the small hit is completed when the V attacker closes after the second opening. In the present embodiment, although the possibility of V winning at the time of a small win is not 0, the gaming state is not changed even if V winning is assumed. Further, in this embodiment, there are cases where a V winning is easy at the time of a big hit and cases where a V winning is difficult, and the V attacker (second big winning opening 54) and the V bell are set so that the V winning is difficult at the time of a small win. Although the opening pattern of the (displacement member 39) is defined, it is difficult to win V in both the first round at the time of big hit and the first opening at the time of small hit. It may be controlled so that the V winning is easy only at the big hit and the V winning is difficult only at the small hit. By controlling in this way, when the big hit time when V winning is difficult is controlled, there is no situation in which the second round of production is performed even though V winning is not made, so it is ensured that 1.2 It can look like a seed mixer. In the case of the 1 or 2 type mixing machine, since the subsequent opening is performed only when the V is won during the small hit, if the attacker continues to open even though the V is not won, the big hit This is to notify that there is, but according to this, if there is an opportunity to get a ball even if the V prize is unsuccessful (the sense of relief), the player can be recognized. it can.

  Referring to FIG. 78 again, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it is a big hit or a small hit (S401). In the case of big hit or small hit, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S402. If it is not a big hit or a small hit, the sub CPU 201 ends the V effect setting process.

  In S402, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to start opening the V attacker (second big prize opening 54). When starting to release the V attacker, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S403. When the opening of the V attacker is not started, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S404.

  In step S <b> 403, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting an effect related to the V attacker opening.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit (S404). If it is a big win, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S405. If it is a small hit instead of a big hit, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S412.

  In step S <b> 405, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the V winning is successful. If the V winning is successful, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S406. If the V winning is unsuccessful, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S412.

  In step S <b> 406, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting a V winning effect. In the present embodiment, as the V winning effect, an effect of winning a big win is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines again whether or not it is a big hit (S407). If it is a big win, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S408. If it is a small hit instead of a big hit, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S411.

  In step S <b> 408, the sub CPU 201 determines again whether the V winning is successful. If the V winning is successful, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S409. If the V winning is unsuccessful, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S410.

  In step S409, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting a jackpot start effect when the V winning is successful. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the V effect setting process.

  In S410, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a jackpot start effect at the time of V winning failure. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the V effect setting process.

  In step S <b> 411, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting a big hit acquisition failure effect as the small hit end effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the V effect setting process.

  In step S <b> 412, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the period in which V winning can be completed has ended. In the case of the end of the period in which the V winning can be completed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S413. If it is not the end of the V winning period, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S413. Note that in the case of a small win, an effect display of V winning failure is always performed, so it is not determined whether or not a V winning has been made. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be determined whether or not a V prize has been won, and if a V prize has been won, it may be informed that it is a small win. By controlling in this way, it is possible to clearly notify the gameability to the player who recognizes that it is a 1 or 2 type mixer.

  In step S413, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting a V winning failure effect. In the present embodiment, as a V prize failure production, a big hit non-winning production is executed. As an effect when the V prize is won, an effect that suggests shifting to certain change, for example, an effect such as performing V display, etc., and an effect that suggests not shifting to certain change as an effect when V winning is unsuccessful. For example, effects such as V display not being performed and a character losing the game may be executed.

[Button press production setting processing]
FIG. 79 shows button press effect setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The button press effect setting process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to determine the mode of the button press effect when executing the effect mode determination process.

  Here, the button pressing effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the button pressing effect is an effect of displaying a button image 2000 simulating the effect button 23 in the display area 13a, and is performed in order to prompt the player to press the effect button 23 or repeatedly hit it. (When displaying a normal button) and when causing a character 2010 to appear together with the button image 2000 (when displaying a character button). When a normal button is displayed, a button image 2000 related to the normal button appears at the timing of the button IN, and then when the player presses the effect button 23 within the button pressing effective period, for example, in the case of a big hit or miss A display related to the press effect is displayed. Although not particularly shown within the button pressing effective period, an effect that the button image 2000 is pressed every time the player presses the effect button 23, a meter for counting down the button pressing effective time, and the like are displayed. The

  On the other hand, when the character button is displayed, the button image 2000 related to the normal button appears at the timing of the button IN as in the case of displaying the normal button. After that, the character 2010 appears on the video together with the button image 2000, and the effect display such that the character 2010 presses the button image 2000 is executed. After that, even if the player does not actually press down the effect button 23, for example, in the case of a big hit or a loss, a display related to the press effect is automatically performed. That is, when displaying a normal button and displaying a character button, an effect mode displayed at the timing of the button IN (appearance of the button image 2000) and an effect mode displayed at the timing of the final press effect (Display of big hit or loss) is the same. Also, the expectation of jackpot is higher when the character button is displayed than when the normal button is displayed.

  With reference to FIG. 79 again, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the effect related to the button stroke by lottery (S421). When executing the effect related to the button stroke, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S422. When the effect related to the button stroke is not executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S423.

  In step S <b> 422, the sub CPU 201 executes button repeated effect setting processing. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the button press effect setting process.

  In S423, the sub CPU 201 determines by lottery whether or not to execute a press effect related to the character button. When executing the press effect related to the character button, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S423. When the pressing effect related to the character button is not executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S425.

  In S424, the sub CPU 201 executes a character button effect setting process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the button press effect setting process.

  In S425, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect that prompts other buttons to be pressed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the button press effect setting process.

[Button Strike Effect Setting Process]
FIG. 80 illustrates button repeated effect setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The button repeated effect setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the button press effect setting process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the button repeated effect flag is “1” as a result of drawing effects based on the variation pattern, the gaming state, the winning lottery result, and the like. The button hitting effect flag is a flag that is set to “1” until the button operation effective time elapses when the button hitting effect is obtained as a lottery result. When the button hit effect is obtained as a lottery result, the button hit effect flag is set to “0” as an initial value. When the value of the button repeated impact flag is “1”, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S434. When the value of the button repeated effect flag is not “1”, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S432.

  In S432, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting any one of the scenarios 1 to 8 shown in the button continuous hit rank-up scenario table of FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting “1” to the button continuous hit effect flag (S433).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect button 23 has been pressed (S434). When the effect button 23 is pressed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S435. If the effect button 23 is not pressed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S440.

  In step S435, the sub CPU 201 refers to the rank-up threshold value from the button continuous hit rank-up scenario table of FIG. 46 based on the button operation effective time and the scenario.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the level difference between the level according to the present accumulated point accumulated value and the rank-up threshold is 2 or more. If the level difference between the current level and the rank-up threshold is 2 or more, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S437. If the level difference between the current level and the rank-up threshold is not 2 or more, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S441.

  In step S437, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting the probability of the rank-up lottery pattern to “high probability”. As a result, in the next rank-up lottery process, the possibility that points will be awarded each time the effect button 23 is pressed repeatedly within the effective operation time is relatively increased, and the accumulated point value is likely to increase.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for ranking up (S438). In the lottery related to the rank-up, a lottery is performed as to whether or not points are given based on the probability of the rank-up lottery pattern set in S437 or S441 described later.

  Next, when the level corresponding to the current accumulated point value reaches LV4, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for displaying a predetermined icon image (S439). When the icon image is displayed, after that, even if the effect button 23 is pressed, the lottery related to rank up may not be performed.

  Next, when the button operation valid period ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the button repeated impact effect and performs a process of setting “0” in the button repeated impact flag (S440). When this process is finished, the sub CPU 201 finishes the button repeated hitting effect setting process. Note that such a button repeated impact setting process is controlled according to the scenario set together with the button repeated impact flag, but the lottery related to the rank increase in S438 may be performed only within the button operation effective time. Good.

  In S441, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting the probability of the rank-up lottery pattern determined according to the scenario. For example, if the level difference between the current level and the rank-up threshold is not 2 or more, and the rank-up lottery pattern does not correspond to “success / failure” or “failure” with reference to the button continuous hit rank-up scenario table of FIG. The probability of the rank-up lottery pattern is set to “low probability”. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S348. In the present embodiment, the points are increased when winning the rank-up lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the level may be directly increased when winning the rank-up lottery.

[Character button effect setting processing]
FIG. 81 shows a character button effect setting process by the sub CPU 201. The character button effect setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the button press effect setting process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a button to appear (S451). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 changes the color of the button image 2000 in accordance with, for example, the expectation level for jackpot.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting a character to appear (S452). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the type of the character 2010 that appears together with the button image 2000 according to the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting an action in which the character presses the button (S453). In this process, the sub CPU 201 changes the action of the character 2010 pressing the button image 2000 according to, for example, the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting a final pressing effect (S454). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the contents of the effect display to be executed after the action of the character 2010 pressing the button image 2000 according to the degree of expectation of the big hit, for example.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for invalidating the operation of the effect button 23 (S455). As a result, while the effect of the character button is being displayed and the button image 2000 is being displayed, even if the effect button 23 is pressed, no effect is executed.

  It should be noted that a predetermined effect may be executed in response to a pressing operation of the effect button 23 even during the character button effect display. The color of the button image 2000 is normally white, for example, and may be red when the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher than normal, and may be rainbow when the big hit is confirmed. As the selection of the character, for example, the character A may be selected normally, the character B may be selected when the expectation of the big hit is higher than normal, and the character C may be selected when the big hit is confirmed. As an action selection, for example, an action in which the character 2010 normally jumps and presses the button image 2000 is selected, and when the expectation level of the jackpot is higher than normal, the character 2010 presses the button image 2000 with both hands. If an action is selected and the jackpot is confirmed, an action may be selected in which the character 2010 presses the button image 2000 while sleeping. Further, a unique action may be associated with each character type. In this case, the character and the action are in a one-to-one combination, and the expectation degree of the big hit is determined only by selecting the character type, but when the character and the action are variously combined, the big hit is determined according to the combination. You may make it suggest an expectation degree. As the selection of the pressing effect, for example, a loss effect is usually selected if it is off, and an effect of confirming the big hit is selected if it is a big hit, but it corresponds to the timing (at the time of V winning) when the big hit and the probability change are decided. The production of the content to be performed may be selected. In addition, the pressing effect is not limited to the big hit expectation, but may indicate a gaming state, or may notify a certain privilege (granting points) or the like. The big hit expectation may be higher in the case of the display effect related to the character button than in the case of the display effect related to the normal button.

[Safe mode setting process]
FIG. 82 shows safe mode setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The safe mode setting process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to set the LED brightness during the effect operation when executing the effect mode determination process.

  Here, a safe mode related to LED luminance will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the sub CPU (host control circuit) 201 transmits a message specifying the target LED and its luminance as the effect designation information to the LED control circuit 207, and the LED control circuit 207 receives the received message. The LED output signal is supplied to the LED 59 designated based on the above. The LED 59 is controlled to be lit at a specified luminance. More specifically, a plurality of SPIs (Serial Peripheral Interfaces) 207A for serial communication are connected to the LED control circuit 207, and each of the SPIs 207A has a plurality of devices 207B corresponding to an LED substrate or an LED drive circuit. Are connected, and a plurality of LEDs 59 are connected to each of the devices 207B via a plurality of ports 207C. For example, in the LED control circuit 207, when SPI0, the device 15, and the port 15 are set as parameters at the time of activation, the LED 59 indicated by an arrow is designated.

  The sub CPU (host control circuit) 201 shifts to the safe mode based on the luminance value of the LED 59 set in the LED control circuit 207. The safe mode means a state in which, for example, when the luminance value of the LED 59 per minute is equal to or higher than a predetermined reference value, the luminance value of the LED 59 is reduced to a limited value (restricted luminance value). The luminance value per frame (1/30 s) of the LED 59 is, for example, 100% by multiplying the PWM value of the pulse width duty ratio 12 steps by the DAC value of the current value 64 steps by the D / A conversion. Becomes “768” and 50% becomes “384”. With respect to the luminance value per frame of the LED 59, for example, assuming that a value corresponding to 50% of the average luminance value for 1 minute is a predetermined reference value, the predetermined reference value is a luminance value 50 per frame. % × 1 minute (60 s) = 384 × 1800 = 691200. After setting such a predetermined reference value, the sub CPU 201 measures the luminance value designated for the LED 59 for each frame, and accumulates the values obtained by measuring for one minute. When the cumulative value for 1 minute obtained in this way exceeds the reference value of 691200, it is recognized that the reference value is over and the safe mode is entered. In the safe mode, for example, a value obtained by multiplying the DAC value by 0.5 is set as the limited luminance value, and the LED 59 is controlled to be turned on based on such a limited luminance value. As a result, when the lighting frequency of the predetermined LED 59 is increased and a situation in which heat accumulation is likely to occur around the predetermined LED 59, the safe mode is set so that the luminance value is automatically reduced only for the predetermined LED 59. . The safe mode is provided for the purpose of protecting the LED that is particularly prone to heat accumulation, but is not limited thereto, and may be provided from the viewpoint of simply extending the life of the LED that is frequently lit.

  Referring to FIG. 82 again, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of calculating the luminance value set for the target LED per unit time (for example, 1 minute) (S461).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the luminance value per unit time calculated in S461 exceeds a preset reference value (S462). When the luminance value per unit time exceeds the reference value, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S463. When the luminance value per unit time does not exceed the reference value, the sub CPU 201 ends the safe mode setting process.

  In step S463, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting a luminance value set after the reference value is exceeded as a limited luminance value. As a result, the safe mode is set, and the LED 59 is controlled to be turned on in a range not exceeding the limit luminance value.

  It should be noted that the limit luminance value can be canceled when the following conditions are satisfied. For example, the limit brightness value may be canceled on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the limit brightness value was set. In addition, the safe mode itself may be canceled by the brightness adjustment function on condition that an artificial operation by a player or a hall clerk is performed. Further, the limited luminance value may be canceled on condition that the contents of the work RAM 203 are cleared in response to power interruption or power on / off. In addition, the LED usage frequency (number of settings, etc.) per unit time is set as the safe mode cancellation condition, and the safe mode itself is changed when the measured value satisfies the safe mode cancellation condition after continuously measuring the usage frequency. You may make it cancel. The safe mode release condition in this case is a case where the luminance value per unit time is 0, for example.

[Special effect setting process]
FIG. 83 shows special effect setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The special effect setting process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to set a special effect when executing the effect mode determination process.

  Here, the special effects will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 96A to 96E, for example, in a fluctuation effect pattern (sub fluctuation pattern) with a normal reach mode, initial movement, high speed fluctuation, low speed fluctuation, reach mode display, loss display, stop display Is executed. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the initial movement, for example, a variable display is started in the order in which the decorative symbols 1000 are arranged, and a moving image in which the symbols flow in the vertical direction is displayed in the order in which the variable display is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), a moving image in which all the decorative symbols 1000 flow in the vertical direction is displayed in the high-speed fluctuation and the low-speed fluctuation. During high-speed fluctuation, the symbol is displayed as if the symbol fluctuated at a relatively high speed, which suggests to the player that the symbol does not stop for a while. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation, the symbol is displayed as if the symbol fluctuates at a relatively low speed, which suggests to the player that the symbol will eventually stop.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), in the reach mode display, for example, the decorative symbols 1000 located on the left side and the right side are stopped and displayed with the same symbol type, and the central decorative symbol 1000 is continuously displayed variably due to low-speed fluctuations. The

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), in the losing display, for example, the decorative pattern 1000 in the center is displayed in a different symbol type from the left and right symbols, resulting in a losing display mode. At this time, the decorative pattern 1000 at the center, the left side, and the right side is displayed so as to be slightly shaken, so that it is not in a completely stopped state, and is variably displayed for production.

  Finally, as shown in FIG. 96 (e), in the stop display, the display of the decorative symbols 1000 is displayed so that the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 1000 is settled, so that the variable display is finished, and all the decorative symbols 1000 are each set to a predetermined symbol type. Completely stopped and displayed in the confirmed state.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), in the story effect section and the battle effect section in ST, the effect patterns are determined in the following order.

  First, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the story effect section in ST, when a variation pattern is determined in the main (main control circuit 70), a variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the sub (sub control circuit 200). Thus, the sub CPU 201 determines a variation effect pattern (sub variation pattern) based on the variation pattern designation command (2).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 designates a stop display mode (a combination of symbols) of the decorative symbols based on the variation effect pattern (3).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 designates an effect pattern related to the notice based on the change effect pattern (4). For example, the effect pattern specified here includes, for example, a reach pattern indicating the reach form of a symbol.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 designates an operation pattern at the time when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped based on the variation effect pattern (5).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 designates an operation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol based on the variation effect pattern (6).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the battle effect section during ST, when the variation pattern is confirmed in the main (main control circuit 70), the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the sub (sub control circuit 200). Thus, for example, at the time of a pending winning, the sub CPU 201 performs lottery of the effect pattern related to the prefetch effect based on the change pattern designation command and the prefetch effect table of FIG. 43 (1). Further, the contents of the variation pattern designation command are included in the hold information.

  Then, when the symbol variation start time based on the hold information is reached, the sub CPU 201 determines a change effect pattern (sub change pattern) based on the change pattern designation command included in the hold information (2).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 designates a stop display mode (a combination of symbols) of the decorative symbols based on the variation effect pattern (3).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 designates an effect pattern related to the notice based on the change effect pattern (4). For example, the effect pattern specified here includes, for example, a reach pattern indicating the reach form of a symbol.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 designates an operation pattern at the time when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped based on the variation effect pattern (5).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 designates an operation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol based on the variation effect pattern (6).

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), for example, when a battle effect is executed during ST, although it is the same as the normal change effect pattern from the initial movement to the reach mode display through the high speed change and the low speed change, After that, a battle effect such as battle reach by video is executed together with the display of the pattern loss. Further, for example, during ST, although the normal variation effect pattern is similar from the initial movement to the high-speed variation, the special effect may be executed without displaying the reach mode thereafter. This special effect is, for example, an effect in which a movable accessory is operated during a high-speed fluctuation of a decorative symbol, or a freezing of the decorative symbol suddenly during the fluctuation (for example, stopping in a changing manner or turning off the screen) Meaning that the decorative design is not visible). Even when such a special effect is selected, the designation of the stop designation display as the reach pattern of the decorative symbol during ST and the designation of the effect pattern (including the reach pattern) related to the advance notice are performed. When the special effect is executed after the end, it is necessary to perform control so as not to transmit the display pattern of the decorative design related to the reach pattern to the display control circuit 205. The special effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect may be executed in the middle of the high-speed fluctuation. Even in such a case, the effect of high-speed fluctuation can be interrupted, and then a special effect without a reach pattern can be smoothly executed.

  By the way, the special effect is an effect that is executed during the ST and in the battle effect section, and can occur only in a limited situation. Therefore, when the special effect is executed in this embodiment, the reach pattern is an exception process. Is not sent by. As a result, the lottery processing program for the sub CPU 201 to determine the production pattern is simplified as much as possible without providing a conditional branch that exclusively corresponds to the special production.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the variation effect pattern related to the 10.0 second variation, “variation start” → “various notice first stage” → “various notice second stage” → “various notice three stages” The contents of the performance are executed in the order of “eye (swing)” → “third stage of various notices (failure)”, and finally “change stop” in the form of loss.

  In addition, in the variation production pattern related to reach fluctuation, “variation start” → “various notice first stage” → “various notice second stage” → “various notice third stage (risk)” → “various notice third stage ( The content of the effect is executed in the order of “success)”, and after the “left and right tempered symbol stop (reach mode display)”, a battle effect such as “VS boss battle” is executed.

  In the variation production pattern related to the special production, “variation start” → “various notice first stage” → “various notice second stage” → “various notice third stage (risk)” → “various notice third stage ( The production contents are executed in the order of “success”), and then the special production is executed. That is, the reach pattern that is selected simultaneously with the content of the notice effect is not transmitted.

  Referring to FIG. 83 again, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the special effect based on the variation pattern designation command (S471). When executing the special effect, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S472. When the special effect is not executed, the sub CPU 201 ends the special effect setting process.

  In step S472, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting an effect pattern.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a symbol (S473).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a notice effect setting process (S474). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting a variation stop pattern (S475).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting an operation pattern at the start of fluctuation (S476).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 stops transmission of reach patterns (S477).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting the content of the special effect (S478). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the special effect setting process.

[Notification effect setting process]
FIG. 84 shows a notice effect setting process performed by the sub CPU 201. The notice effect setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special effect setting process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for selecting the content of the notice effect (S481).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the notice effect is finally successful (S482). If the notice effect is finally successful, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S483. If the notice effect does not finally succeed, but fails, for example, the sub CPU 201 ends the notice effect setting process.

  In step S483, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a reach mode based on the reach pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the notice effect setting process.

  In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, it is good also as follows.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 99, as the operation pattern related to the V winning at the big hit, the same operation pattern as that at the small hit shown in FIG. 93 may be provided. For example, as shown in the figure, when the round pattern at the time of the big hit is composed of 16 rounds as the big hits A to D, it is difficult to win the V prize shown in FIG. 99 in the first round and the eleventh round in the big hit A. In the big hit B, the V winning difficult operation pattern shown in FIG. 99 is applied in the first round, and the easy V winning operating pattern shown in FIG. 93 is applied in the eleventh round. The easy-to-win V operation pattern shown in FIG. 93 is applied to the first round, and the difficult V-winning operation pattern shown in FIG. 99 is applied to the eleventh round. The operation pattern for easy V winning shown in FIG. 93 is applied. According to such a round pattern at the time of jackpot, the possibility of winning a V is different depending on the type of jackpot, and the expectation for a more advantageous type of jackpot can be increased.

  In addition, even when an operation pattern that is difficult to win a V prize as shown in FIG. 99 is applied as the operation pattern at the time of a big hit, the process shown in FIG. 100 may be performed as the V effect setting process. . In FIG. 100, the processing of S401 to S407 and S411 to S413 is the same as that shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 100, in the case of a big win in S407, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S500 regardless of whether the V winning is successful or the V winning is failed, and always selects the same big hit starting effect. Good. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in S407, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S411 as in FIG. 78, and performs a process of selecting a big hit acquisition failure effect as a small hit end effect. According to this, regardless of the result of the V winning, it is possible to share the big hit start production after the second round, and it is possible to simplify the processing related to the production control only by distinguishing whether the big hit or the small win. .

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. In the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, for example, a ball game machine and an enclosed game machine. In addition to the gaming machines listed above, general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as gaming machines, slot machines, and pachislot gaming machines.

  Based on the above embodiment, the outline | summary of this invention is enumerated below.

(About Appendix A)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine having a different effect that is easily executed according to the effect mode being executed at that time is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

  However, in the technology as described above, even if the execution frequency of the effect is changed according to the effect mode, it is easy to estimate the execution frequency of the effect from the effect mode grasped by the player. There is a problem that it is limited and the interest in the production is reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately selecting an effect so as not to lower the interest in the effect.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix A1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), the identification information (for example, special symbol) is changed in accordance with the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is determined in advance. Main control means (for example, main CPU 71) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player in response to the special display mode (for example, jackpot symbol display mode). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result by the main control means,
After completion of the special gaming state among a plurality of tables including a first table (for example, a low pre-table) and a second table (for example, a low table) associated with information capable of specifying the variation time of the identification information Use table switching information (for example, preliminarily defined according to the execution result of the special gaming state) in units of the number of times (for example, the number of fluctuations) of the predetermined starting condition that is established after the special gaming state ends. , Variation state selection table by gaming state)
As an effect controlled by the effect control means,
A first effect that can be executed when the lottery result is a lottery result controlled in the special gaming state (for example, pseudo 1-4 premier);
It is an effect different from the first effect, and is an effect that can be executed when the lottery result is a lottery result controlled to the special gaming state, and the possibility of being controlled to the special gaming state is the first A second effect lower than one effect (for example, per pseudo 1 to 4),
When the lottery result is a lottery result controlled to the special gaming state, when the main control means performs a lottery based on the first table, than when a lottery is performed based on the second table There is a high possibility that the production control means controls the first production,
When the main control means performs lottery based on the second table, the effect control means is more likely to control the second effect than the first effect,
The main control means switches the table based on the usage table switching information and the number of times the predetermined start condition is established, and specifies the variation time of the identification information based on the table,
The effect control means controls the effect according to the variation time of the identification information specified by the main control means.

  In the above configuration, which table (low pre-table, low table) to be referred to when the start winning is established is defined according to the execution result of the big hit gaming state, and according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol The table is switched, but the production itself is performed according to the variation time, so the table switching is not perceived from the production. For this reason, for example, the player may perceive that the premier effect is selected at a low probability even though the premier effect is actually set to be selected with a high probability when the premier effect is executed. Thus, by making it impossible for the player to detect that the table has been switched internally, the player's interest in the premier effect can be enhanced.

(Appendix A2)
In this game machine,
The main control means includes a high-probability gaming state with a relatively high probability of transition to the special gaming state (for example, a probability variation gaming state) and a low-probability gaming state with a relatively low transition probability to the special gaming state ( For example, it is possible to control the non-probability game state)
The main control means controls the low-probability gaming state when the predetermined starting condition is established a certain number of times (for example, 124 fluctuations) in the high-probability gaming state,
In the use table switching information, a table other than the first table and the second table is specified up to the predetermined number of times, and if the predetermined number of times is exceeded, the first table or the second table is specified. Features.

  In the above configuration, even when the gaming state after the big hit ends changes according to the number of fluctuations, it is possible to perform control related to the presentation according to the gaming state. Since the direction of the effect can be changed by switching the game, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the effect including the premier effect.

(Appendix A3)
In this game machine,
In the usage table switching information, the second table is further defined such that the usage table switching information is selected in response to the initial power-on.

  In the above configuration, since control to the big hit gaming state has never been performed when the power is initially turned on, control is performed so that the effect is selected based on the low table. Thus, since it is possible to provide a difference in the execution frequency of the premier effect depending on whether or not the big hit gaming state is executed, it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

(Appendix A4)
In this game machine,
The usage table switching information is characterized in that the second table is defined as the number of times that the predetermined start condition is satisfied exceeds a specific number of times (for example, 700 times of variation).

  In the above configuration, the change effect table is switched from when the big hit gaming state is executed until the specific change number (700 times) is reached, and after the specific change number is exceeded, the change effect table (premier low probability) is displayed. Selected. That is, by providing a period during which the premier effect is easily selected before the specific number of changes is exhausted, it is possible to enhance the interest in the number of changes and the premier effect.

(About Appendix B)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine having a different effect that is easily executed according to the effect mode being executed at that time is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

  However, in the general gaming machine as described above, there is a problem in that when the effects are superimposed, the visibility is disturbed to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the effects.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily grasp the effects.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix B1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), and identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player in accordance with a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) 1)
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result;
Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) for performing display related to the effect controlled by the effect control means,
As an effect controlled by the effect control means, at least a time effect controlled in time units (for example, a story effect) and an effect that can be displayed at least partially superimposed on the display of the time effect, A timed effect (for example, a chance effect) controlled at any timing during one change of the identification information,
When the time effect and the timely effect are executed when the time effect is not executed at the start of the change of the identification information, the effect control means executes the time effect at the start of the change of the identification information. Sometimes, the time from the start of the change of the identification information to the execution of the timed effect is kept longer than when the timed effect is executed.

In the above configuration, since the story effect is an effect that is controlled in units of time, the story effect may be executed across a plurality of variations of the decorative design.
On the other hand, as for the chance effect, when the story effect is being performed, the chance effect display may be superimposed at least partially with the display of the story effect. When executed, it may be difficult to see the story production.
Therefore, in the above configuration, when the variation of the decorative design at which the story effect and the chance effect start is the same, the chance effect is executed more than when the story effect is executed before the chance effect. It is characterized by delaying the timing.
According to the above configuration, for example, by ensuring the time until the chance effect is executed when the story effect is executed for the first time, the story effect can be easily grasped. Further, when the story effect is executed before the chance effect, it is considered that the story effect has been seen to some extent, and the chance effect can be executed early. Thus, adjusting the timing of starting the chance effect makes it easier for the player to grasp the story effect.

(Appendix B2)
In this game machine,
The time production is composed of a series of production contents (for example, story introduction contents by interface notice) as one set,
The production control means, in one variation of the identification information,
When the production of one production content among the plurality of production contents is finished, in the next variation of the one variation, the production of the next production content of the one production content is executed,
When the timely effect is executed when the effect of one effect content is being executed among the plurality of effect contents, the next effect content of the one effect content is changed in the next change of the one change. It is characterized by performing a production.

  In the above configuration, regarding the interface notice included in the story production, when a plurality of story introduction contents are controlled in one set and one story introduction contents are executed or one story introduction contents are executed, a chance When the production is executed, the next production of the decorative pattern is executed together with the next story introduction content. According to the above configuration, for example, when one story introduction content has been viewed before execution of the chance effect, the interest in the story effect can be enhanced as compared with the case where the story effect is executed with a simple passage of time.

(About Appendix C)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine having a different effect that is easily executed according to the effect mode being executed at that time is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

  However, with the above-described technique, there is a problem that even if the execution frequency of the effect can be changed according to the effect mode, if the trigger for changing the effect mode is monotonous, the interest in the effect is reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in performance.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix C1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), and identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player in accordance with a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) 1)
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling the production according to the lottery result,
As the effects controlled by the effect control means, a predetermined effect (for example, a story effect) that is controlled in units of time and consists of a plurality of stages of effect modes, and a specific effect mode (for example, controlled after the special gaming state ends) A specific effect (for example, boss defeat by battle effect) that can be executed in the battle effect section) is provided,
The production control means includes
When the specific effect is executed during the specific effect mode and the special gaming state is controlled, the predetermined stage in the next stage from the stage of the predetermined effect performed after the previous special gaming state ends. Perform the production,
When the execution of the predetermined effect is ended in one change in the identification information, the identification information is counted a specific number of times (for example, 99 times of change from the time of the next change, after the special gaming state is ended). ) Until it fluctuates, it controls the effect as being in the specific effect mode,
When the special game state is executed without executing the specific effect during the specific effect mode, the effect is controlled as the specific effect mode from the end of the special game state until the specific number of times. It is possible to carry out.

In the above configuration, the story effect is controlled in units of time, and the condition for the story effect to proceed to the next stage is that the boss is destroyed by the battle effect during the battle effect section, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. . In the battle effect section, when the boss is defeated by the battle effect and the game state is the big hit game state, it is performed after the story production after the big hit game state is finished. Continue until you reach. In addition, if the boss defeat by the battle effect is not executed during the battle effect section and the jackpot game state is entered, the battle effect section is set until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches, for example, 99 times after the jackpot game state ends.
That is, the battle effect section is shortened after the big hit when the boss is defeated by the battle effect, and the battle effect section is long after the big hit is finished when the boss is not defeated by the battle effect.
Therefore, according to the above configuration, for example, for a player who wants to advance the stage of the story production, if the stage of the story production does not proceed, the stage of the story production is more than the case where the stage of the story production proceeds. Can be provided for a long time, that is, the battle production section can be provided for a long time, and the interest in story production and battle production can be improved.

(Appendix C2)
In this game machine,
As the special gaming state, at least a first special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state in which V winning is difficult) and a second special gaming state (for example, easy to win a V prize which is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state). Jackpot gaming state), and,
The effect control means executes the specific effect during the specific effect mode, and when the second special game state is controlled, the predetermined effect executed after the previous second special game state ends. The predetermined performance in the next stage from the stage is executed.

  According to the above configuration, the type of jackpot gaming state that influences the V winning with respect to the progress of the production stage is also added as a condition, so that it is possible to enhance the interest regarding the progress of the stage and the type of jackpot gaming state.

(Appendix C3)
In this game machine,
The effect control means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, an effect related to the effect executed during the most recent fluctuation of the identification information (for example, straddling big effect) during the special game state. Features.

  In the above-described configuration, it is possible to perform the big role straddling effect including the boss destruction by combining the time when the special symbol fluctuates and the time during the big hit. According to the above configuration, the player's interest in the production is enhanced by the production executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the battle production of the boss destruction executed during the big hit, and the story production executed after the big hit. Can do.

(About Appendix D)
There has been disclosed a gaming machine that can tell a player the expectation level of a pseudo-continuous performance even during a linked performance using an RTC (real-time clock) (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180295).

  However, in the pseudo continuous effect as described above, the pseudo identification information is stopped (temporarily stopped) a plurality of times, and after the pseudo continuous effect is further performed, various effects may be linked. If such a pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed within a predetermined fluctuation time, there is a problem that time distribution becomes difficult and the types of effects are limited.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of bringing a variety of effects.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix D1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), and identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) is changed in accordance with a lottery result, and a display result of the identification information is determined in advance. In a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a big winning gaming state) advantageous to the player in response to a special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) There,
A re-variation control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of executing re-variation display (for example, pseudo-continuous) for resuming the variation display after temporarily stopping the variation display of the identification information during the variation time of the identification information. ,
As the time when the re-variable display is executed, a first re-variable display time (for example, 3.5 s) and a second re-variable display time (for example, 7 s) longer than the first re-variable display time are defined. And
The re-variation control means is a predetermined re-variation display (for example, a high-speed display) that executes the re-variation display by combining the first re-variation display time and the second re-variation display time in the variation time of the identification information. Pseudo-ream), and the number of variable displays executed during the variation time even if the variation time is the same due to the combination of the first revariable display time and the second revariable display time. It is possible to make them different.

  In the above configuration, when executing a so-called pseudo-ream, a combination of a relatively short first revariable display time of 3.5 s and a relatively long second revariable display time of 7 s, for example, are combined. It is possible to execute a high-speed pseudo-ream, and even if the variation time is the same, it is possible to vary the number of times of variation display performed during the variation time. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the types of effects related to the pseudo-ream increase, and it becomes possible to bring diversity to the effects, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(Appendix D2)
In this game machine,
It further includes production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result,
The re-variation control means is responsive to a third re-variation display time (for example, a time related to normal pseudo-continuation 1 to 4 times) different from both the first re-variation display time and the second re-variation display time. Perform a specific re-variation display (for example, a normal pseudo-ream) that performs the re-variation display;
As a production controlled by the production control means, at least a specific production (e.g., after the predetermined re-variation display is performed) and after the specific re-variation display is performed (for example, (Directions related to normal reach)
The effect control means executes the specific effect executed after the predetermined re-variable display is performed and the specific effect executed after the specific re-variable display is performed at the same timing. And

  In the above configuration, the timing for performing the effect related to normal reach after performing the high-speed pseudo-ream and the timing for executing the effect related to normal reach after performing the normal pseudo-ream (see FIG. 91). Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to share the production process related to normal reach, and the production can be executed with simple processing.

(Appendix D3)
In this game machine,
It further includes production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result,
The re-variation control means is a re-variable display longer than the predetermined re-variable display, and a third re-variable display time (for example, different from both the first re-variable display time and the second re-variable display time) A specific re-variation display (for example, a normal pseudo-ream) that performs the re-variation display according to a normal pseudo-ream 1 to 4 times)
As a production controlled by the production control means, at least a specific production (e.g., after the predetermined re-variation display is performed) and after the specific re-variation display is performed (for example, An effect related to normal reach) and a special effect (for example, fluctuation fluctuation) that is executed after the predetermined re-variation display is performed and before the specific effect is performed,
The effect control means includes the specific effect that is executed after the predetermined re-variation display is performed, and the specific effect that is executed after the specific re-change display is performed and after the special effect. It is characterized by executing at the same timing.

In the above configuration, the timing for executing the effect related to normal reach after performing the normal pseudo-ream and the timing for executing the effect related to normal reach after performing the fluctuation fluctuation by performing the high-speed pseudo-ream are the same. Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to share the production process related to normal reach, and the production can be executed with simple processing.
In the above configuration, since the normal pseudo-series is longer than the high-speed pseudo-series, for example, the timing for executing the effect related to the normal reach can be adjusted by fluctuation of shaking.

(About Appendix E)
A gaming machine that shifts to a probable gaming state when a game ball enters a specific area during a big hit is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-57840).

  However, in the general technique as described above, whether or not the game medium passes through the specific area is an important effect, and when the player recognizes that the game medium has passed through the specific area, the player enters the probability changing game state. Since it is possible to grasp when the transition is made, the recognition of the gaming state is clear, but there is a problem that the effect on the gaming state cannot be performed more than that.

  This invention is made | formed in view of the said problem, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which can improve the interest of the production | presentation which concerns on a specific area using the production | presentation with respect to a game state.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix E1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), and identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player in accordance with a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) 1)
Movable member control means (for example, main CPU 71) for controlling a movable member (for example, shutter 54a and displacement member 39) in an open mode in which a specific winning (for example, V winning) is easy and an open mode in which the specific winning is difficult. ,
A high probability gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 71) for controlling a high probability gaming state (for example, a probable variation gaming state) after the special gaming state is finished when the specific winning is made in the special gaming state;
A specific gaming state different from the special gaming state, and a specific gaming state (for example, a small hit) that does not become an advantageous gaming state over the gaming state immediately before the specific gaming state is executed after the specific gaming state is ended. Specific gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 71) for controlling the gaming state),
Production control means for controlling the production (for example, the sub CPU 201),
The production control means includes
When the special winning is made during the special gaming state, a first effect for notifying that the special gaming state has been won (for example, a jackpot starting effect upon successful V winning),
A second effect (for example, a V winning failure effect) for notifying that the special game state has not been won if the specific prize is not won during the specific game state;
A common effect that is executed before the first effect or the second effect is executed during the special game state and the specific game state (for example, a V-attacker opening effect). When,
It is characterized by controlling.

  In the above configuration, in the big hit gaming state, the shutter 54a and the displacement member 39 of the second big prize opening 54 are controlled in an open mode that makes it easy to win a V, and in the small hit game state, the shutter 54a and the displacement member 39 are in an open mode that makes it difficult to win a V prize. In the event of a V-winning during the big win, the big-winning start effect when the V-win is successful is notified by the big-winning start effect when the V-win is successful. A notification that the winner is not won is made. In addition, the common V-attacker opening effect is executed before the big hit start effect and the V prize failure effect when the V prize is successful. According to the above configuration, in reality, for example, even if the gaming state after the small win is controlled by the V winning, it can be shown as if the big winning is won by the V winning. On the other hand, it is possible to provide novel game playability.

(Appendix E2)
In this game machine,
The special gaming state is configured to include a plurality of rounds including specific rounds (for example, 1R and 11R) in which the specific winning is possible,
The production control means executes a common production in a round after the specific round regardless of whether or not the specific prize is won.

  In the above configuration, when the V winning is not won though it is a big win, the fact that it is a big win is not notified, but for example, an effect executed after the end of the first round that can be V won is a non-V winning even at the V winning. It can be made clear that it is a big hit by sharing the time.

(Appendix E3)
In this game machine,
The movable member control means controls the movable member so that the opening mode in the specific gaming state is shorter than the opening mode in the special gaming state,
The production control means performs notification that the special game state has not been won even if the specific prize is won during the specific game state.

  In the above configuration, in the small win game state, there is a possibility of giving a false recognition by notifying that the big win is not won at the time of V winning, but the big hit regardless of whether or not the V winning is won. This can be prevented by shortening the opening mode of the shutter 54a of the second grand prize winning port 54 as compared with the case.

(About Appendix F)
A gaming machine that can acquire points by depressing a button during production has been disclosed (see JP2013-153805A).

  However, in the operation effect as described above, since the player is requested to operate the operation means, the player who sees the operation request grasps that the effect proceeds from the operation means, and as a result, the operation operation is performed. Since the type of production after operating the means is also inferred, there is a problem that the result of the production is grasped from the type of production and the interest in the production is lost.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in performance.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix F1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), and identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player in accordance with a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) 1)
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result;
Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) for performing display related to the effect controlled by the effect control means;
An operation means (for example, a production button 23) capable of accepting an operation by a player,
As an effect controlled by the effect control means,
A first operation including a specific effect (for example, an effect in which the button image 2000 appears) that displays a specific image (for example, a button image 2000) imitating the operation means, and an operation effective period of the operation means is provided. Production (for example, production when displaying a normal button)
Including the specific effect and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which the character 2010 appears) which is an effect in which a predetermined image (for example, the character 2010) operates the displayed specific image, and the operation valid period of the operation means is A second operation effect that is not provided (for example, an effect when a character button is displayed),
The production control means includes
In the first operation effect, an effect performed following the first operation effect at a timing when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period after the specific effect can be controlled.
In the second operation effect, it is possible to control an effect performed following the second operation effect at a timing when the predetermined image is operated on the displayed specific image.

  In the above configuration, the button image 2000 is displayed and the operation effective period by the player is provided, and the first operation effect and the button image 2000 are displayed to execute the effect at the timing operated during the operation effective period. On the other hand, the operation effective period is not provided, and a second operation effect is provided in which a predetermined effect such that the character 2010 operates the button image 2000 is provided. According to this, the player prepares to operate the effect button 23 when the button image 2000 is displayed by the first operation effect, but operates the effect button 23 in the case of the second operation effect. Since the predetermined effect is executed without any problem, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and improve the interest in the effect executed thereafter.

(Appendix F2)
In this game machine,
An effect performed following the first operation effect (for example, an effect indicating that in the case of a big hit or loss) and an effect performed subsequent to the second operation effect (for example, in the case of a big hit or error) Production that shows that) is a common production,
The second operation effect has a higher expectation to shift to the special game state than the first operation effect.

  In the above-described configuration, the effect performed following the first operation effect and the effect performed subsequent to the second operation effect are common effects for notifying the winning result as to whether or not the big hit is achieved, and the second operation Since the direction of the production has a higher expectation level of shifting to the big hit, the player can increase the interest of the character 2010 in the second operation production.

(About Appendix G)
There has been disclosed a gaming machine capable of acquiring points by repeatedly hitting a button during production (see JP2013-153805A).

  However, in the operation effects as described above, the player may be requested to perform more operations than necessary, and as a result, the player loses interest in the effects.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of achieving a balance between an improvement in entertainment and a load on a player's operation.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix G1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), and identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player in accordance with a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) 1)
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result;
Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) for performing display related to the effect controlled by the effect control means;
An operation means (for example, a production button 23) capable of accepting an operation by a player,
At least an operation effective period is defined as an effect controlled by the effect control means, and a specific lottery (for example, rank) for raising the rank in the effect in response to an operation by the player being accepted during the operation effective period. Up lottery) to raise the rank (for example, level) and reach a specific rank (for example, LV4) to perform a specific display (effect that displays an icon image that suggests that the big hit expectation is high) Is provided,
The production control means controls the specific production by dividing the operation effective period into a plurality of intervals,
A predetermined rank threshold value (for example, LV1 to LV4 as an upper limit level) is provided in each interval of the operation effective period,
If there is a predetermined rank difference (for example, a level difference of 2 or more) between the current rank and the rank threshold value at the current interval, the effect control means increases the probability of raising the rank higher than the current probability. The specific lottery is performed with probability.

When the player controls the performance by dividing the effective operation period into multiple intervals, performs a rank-up lottery according to the operation by the player, and performs an effect that gradually raises the level, as the operation effective period approaches The possible number of operations by the player is limited in time, and as a result, the opportunity to rank up is gradually lost over time.
In such a case, if the player becomes desperate to reach a specific level from the remaining time of the effective operation valid period, the player will no longer perform the operation, so that the entertainment interest may be reduced.
However, if the level can be increased without limitation during the operation effective period, it is possible that the level will rise quickly and the production will end, leaving an operation effective period remaining. Then, since it is possible that the interest for the entire production will decline, it is desirable to gradually increase the rank.
On the other hand, in the above configuration, the operation effective period is divided into a plurality of intervals, an upper limit level is provided for each interval, and if there is a predetermined level difference between the upper limit level and the current level, the level when the player operates is determined. It is controlled to make it easier to win a rank-up lottery. Therefore, according to the above configuration, as long as the player performs an operation, the level is raised to some extent and the production progresses. Therefore, it is difficult to lose interest and it is possible to improve the entertainment with respect to the result of the production.

(Appendix G2)
In this game machine,
The effect control means, when the change of the identification information is a change that does not become the special gaming state, when an operation by the player is performed after a specific period of the operation valid period, regardless of the current rank. It is characterized by not raising the rank.

  In the above configuration, if the player is operated by a player after a specific period when the fluctuation is not a big hit, for example, by setting the probability of rank-up lottery to “No”, the current level is any level. It is possible to control so as not to raise the level so that no contradiction occurs between the game result and the performance.

(About Appendix H)
A gaming machine that controls an LED using PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117600).

  However, in the control of the LED (an example of the light emitting means) as described above, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is determined by setting the luminance value. There is a problem that the temperature around the means becomes high, which affects the use of the light emitting means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately use light emitting means.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix H1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), and identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player in accordance with a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) 1)
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result;
Light emitting means (for example, LEDs 59A to 59E, 59e to 59h) that emit light according to the effects controlled by the effect control means;
Setting means (for example, sub CPU 201, LED control circuit 207) capable of setting a luminance value for the light emitting means,
The setting means accumulates the luminance value set in the light emitting means, and when it is determined that the accumulated value within a predetermined time exceeds a predetermined reference value, thereafter, the luminance value set in the light emitting means is limited. It is characterized by doing.

  In the above configuration, for example, when the average luminance value for one minute exceeds a predetermined reference value, the luminance values set in the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are limited, so that the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are cooled. The effect can be expected, and the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h can be used appropriately.

(Appendix H2)
In this game machine,
The setting means determines that the value accumulated within a specific time is equal to or less than a specific reference value (for example, 0) when the luminance value set in the light emitting means is limited (for example, in the safe mode). In this case, the luminance value set in the light emitting unit is not limited thereafter.

  In the above configuration, when the luminance value accumulated within a specific time is equal to or less than a specific reference value, for example, 0, it is determined that the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are cooled, and the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h The safe mode is canceled as a limitation of the set luminance value. According to the above configuration, the luminance values of the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h can be returned to their original values at an appropriate timing when the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are cooled, so the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h Can be used more appropriately.

(Appendix I)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine having a different effect that is easily executed according to the effect mode being executed at that time is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

  In the technique as described above, the types of effects increase when an effect is to be executed, but in general, various effects are executed when the effect is executed. However, there is a problem that execution of various effects complicates the control of the timing at which commands related to effects are transmitted to the effect execution means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily control the transmission timing of a complicated command in a production.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix I1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), and identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player in accordance with a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) 1)
A plurality of effect execution means (for example, display control circuit 205, sound control circuit 206, LED control circuit 207, drive control circuit 208) for executing effects;
Based on a table (for example, a direct table) in which a timing for transmitting a command (for example, a message) relating to the execution of an effect is defined, a transmitting unit (for example, a transmitter that can transmit the command to each of the plurality of effect executing units) Sub CPU 201)
As the type of the table, at least a first table group in which one table is used in one production and a second table group in which a plurality of tables can be used in one production are provided,
In the table of the first table group (for example, a master table), it can be defined to refer to the table of the second table group (for example, a slave table),
When the command is stored in a predetermined area (for example, a direct buffer), the transmission unit registers one table of the first table group corresponding to the command and refers to the one table. A table of the second table group is registered, and the command is transmitted based on the registered table.

  In the above configuration, when a message is stored in the directory buffer, the message is transmitted, and a master table and a slave table in which the timing of transmitting the message is defined are provided. In the master table, any one of the slave tables is provided. Can be specified. Whether or not to use the slave table depends on whether or not the message is stored in the direct buffer so that the slave table can be referred to by the master table corresponding to the message when the message is stored in the direct buffer. Can be determined. Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the slave table is used based on one master table used in one production by simply setting a message to be transmitted in the direct buffer. It is possible to simplify the control of the transmission timing of complex messages.

(Appendix I2)
In this game machine,
As a type of the table, a third table group different from both the first table group and the second table group is provided,
The transmission means includes
The table of the second table group is registered when referenced in the table of the first table group,
When registering a specific table of the first table group and registering a predetermined table of the second table group referred to by the specific table, if the specific table is discarded, the predetermined table Destroy the table,
The table (for example, a single table) of the third table group is registered and discarded regardless of registration and destruction of the table of the first table group.

  In the above configuration, when the master table registration is discarded, the referenced slave table is also discarded, but the single table can be used regardless of the master table registration and destruction. For example, since it is possible to prescribe a message transmission timing commonly used in a plurality of effects in a single table, it is possible to more easily control the transmission timing of complex messages in the effects.

(About Appendix J)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine having a different effect that is easily executed according to the effect mode being executed at that time is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

  In the technique as described above, the types of effects increase when an effect is to be executed, but in general, various effects are executed when the effect is executed. However, when various effects are executed, there is a problem that the control related to the effects becomes wasteful.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently performing control in production.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix J1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), a plurality of pieces of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) are changed according to a lottery result, and a display result of the plurality of pieces of identification information Is controlled in a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player in accordance with a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) (for example, a pachinko game) Machine 1),
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result;
Effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 13, the display control circuit 205) for executing the effect;
Transmission means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of transmitting a command related to the effect to the effect executing means,
As an effect controlled by the effect control means, at least one of the plurality of identification information until a display result of the plurality of identification information is displayed after a predetermined effect (for example, initial movement, high speed fluctuation, low speed fluctuation). A first effect (for example, a battle effect during ST) in which a reach effect in which two pieces of identification information are stopped (for example, a reach aspect display) and an effect that is executed less frequently than the first effect, and after the predetermined effect, A second effect (for example, a special effect during ST) in which a special effect (for example, a special effect) is performed without executing a reach effect is provided,
The production control means selects the production mode of the predetermined production and the production mode of the reach production in the control of the first production and the second production,
In the second effect, the transmission means transmits a command related to the effect aspect of the predetermined effect to the effect execution means, but does not transmit a command related to the effect aspect of the reach effect to the effect execution means. And

  In the above-described configuration, for example, a ST effect during ST and a special effect during ST as a second effect less frequently executed are provided as the first effect. High speed fluctuation is common. Here, in order to increase the efficiency of the process, the first action and the high-speed fluctuation effect mode and the reach effect effect mode are selected in the second effect as well as the first effect having a high execution frequency. Is not transmitted to the display control circuit 205. In this way, the process related to the first effect having a high execution frequency is provided by making the process related to the first effect having a high execution frequency common and providing a process that does not use an unnecessary process result in the second effect having a low execution frequency. Since the processing can be made common without applying a load, it is possible to efficiently control the production.

(Appendix J2)
In this game machine,
The transmission means is capable of transmitting the command to each of the plurality of effect execution means based on a table (for example, a direct table) defined as to whether a command related to the execution of the effect is transmitted.
As the type of the table, at least a first table group in which one table is used in one production and a second table group in which a plurality of tables can be used in one production are provided,
In the table of the first table group (for example, a master table), it can be defined to refer to the table of the second table group (for example, a slave table),
When the command is stored in a predetermined area (for example, a direct buffer), the transmission unit registers one table of the first table group corresponding to the command and refers to the one table. A table of the second table group is registered, and the command is transmitted based on the registered table.

  In the above configuration, when a message is stored in the directory buffer, the message is transmitted, and a master table and a slave table in which the timing of transmitting the message is defined are provided. In the master table, any one of the slave tables is provided. Can be specified. Whether or not to use the slave table depends on whether or not the message is stored in the direct buffer so that the slave table can be referred to by the master table corresponding to the message when the message is stored in the direct buffer. Can be determined. Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the slave table is used based on one master table used in one production by simply setting a message to be transmitted in the direct buffer. It is possible to simplify the control of the transmission timing of complex messages.

(About Appendix K)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine having a different effect that is easily executed according to the effect mode being executed at that time is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

  However, in the general gaming machine as described above, there is a problem that when a plurality of effects are executed, the visibility is disturbed to prevent the player from grasping the contents of the effects.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily grasp the effects.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix K1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), and identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player in accordance with a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) 1)
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result;
Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) for performing display related to the effect controlled by the effect control means;
As an effect controlled by the effect control means, at least a series of a plurality of effect contents (for example, story introduction contents by interface notice) are configured as one set, and a first time effect (for example, story introduction) controlled in units of time. Effect), a second time effect (for example, a character introduction effect) that is configured as one effect content and controlled in units of time, and an effect that at least a part of the display of the first time effect may be displayed. In addition, it is an effect that can be displayed at least partially overlapping the display of the second time effect, and is a timed effect (for example, a chance effect) that is controlled at any timing during one change of the identification information. And provided,
The production control means, in one variation of the identification information,
When an effect of one effect content among the plurality of effect contents is executed in the first time effect, when the predetermined time is executed, or when the timed effect is executed, the one variation of In the next fluctuation, the production of the production content next to the production content of the one is executed,
When the second time effect is executed, the second time effect is ended when the predetermined time is executed or when the timed effect is executed.

  In the above configuration, the story introduction effect is controlled with a predetermined number of times as one set, and the character introduction effect is controlled once. In other words, the story introduction effect can display a series of related information, can display a relatively large amount of information, and the character introduction effect can display information for one time. Therefore, it is possible to display an item with less information than the story introduction effect. According to the above configuration, by combining the story introduction effect and the character introduction effect, the effect can be performed according to the amount of information, and the player can easily grasp the effect.

(Appendix K2)
In this game machine,
In the case where the first time effect and the timely effect are executed when the first time effect is not executed at the start of fluctuation of the identification information, the effect control means is configured to execute the first time at the start of change of the identification information. The time from the start of the change of the identification information to the execution of the timely effect is maintained longer than when the timely effect is executed when the effect is being executed.

In the above configuration, since the story introduction effect is an effect controlled in units of time, the story effect may be executed across a plurality of variations of the decorative design.
On the other hand, for the chance effect, when the story introduction effect is performed, the display of the chance effect is at least partially overlapped with the display of the story introduction effect. For example, when the story introduction effect is executed If the chance production is executed, it may be difficult to see the story introduction production.
Therefore, in the above configuration, when the decorative design that the story introduction effect and the chance effect start are the same, the chance effect is executed more than when the story introduction effect is executed before the chance effect. It is characterized by delaying the timing.
According to the configuration described above, for example, when the story introduction effect is executed for the first time, it is possible to easily grasp the story introduction effect by securing the time until the chance effect is executed. In addition, when the story introduction effect is executed before the chance effect, it is considered that the story introduction effect is finished to some extent, and the chance effect can be executed early. Thus, by adjusting the timing of starting the chance effect, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the story introduction effect.

(Appendix L)
There has been disclosed a gaming machine that can tell a player the expectation level of a pseudo-continuous performance even during a linked performance using an RTC (real-time clock) (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180295).

  However, in the pseudo continuous effect as described above, the pseudo identification information is stopped (temporarily stopped) a plurality of times, and after the pseudo continuous effect is further performed, various effects may be linked. If such a pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed within a predetermined fluctuation time, there is a problem that time distribution becomes difficult and the types of effects are limited.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of bringing a variety of effects.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix L1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), and identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) is changed in accordance with a lottery result, and a display result of the identification information is determined in advance. In a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a big winning gaming state) advantageous to the player in response to a special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) There,
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result;
Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) for performing display related to the effect controlled by the effect control means;
Re-variation control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) capable of executing re-variation display (for example, pseudo-continuous) for resuming the variation display after temporarily stopping the variation display of the identification information in the variation time of the identification information; With
As an effect controlled by the effect control means, at least a predetermined effect (for example, an effect of changing the background color) in which the effect display mode (for example, the background color) can be changed according to the re-variable display is provided.
The effect control means is a final display mode (for example, “rainbow”) that is a final display of the predetermined effect displayed at the time of the last re-variable display that is the re-variable display executed last in the variation time. ), And the display mode of the predetermined effect displayed according to the re-variation display changes from the final display mode from the last re-variation display to the re-variation display that is executed first in the variation time. By obtaining or performing lottery, the display mode (for example, “gold”, “red”, “green”, “blue”) in the middle of the predetermined performance is determined,
The display means displays the display mode determined by the effect control means in accordance with the re-variable display.

  In the above configuration, an effect is provided in which the background color can change according to the pseudo-continuity, the final display color of this effect is determined first, and the background color displayed in the middle according to the final display color is determined by lottery. It is possible. According to the above configuration, for example, even when the pseudo-ream is a high-speed pseudo-ream that indicates the degree of expectation of jackpot, it is possible to randomly change the background color up to the final display color without changing the final display color. Therefore, it is possible to bring diversity to the production accompanied by the pseudo-ream.

(Appendix L2)
In this game machine,
A first re-variable display time (for example, 3.5 s) in which the re-variable display is executed and a second re-variable display time (for example, 7 s) longer than the first re-variable display time are defined in advance,
The re-variation control means executes the re-variation display by combining the first re-variation display time and the second re-variation display time according to the number of executions determined by the execution number determination means. Display (for example, high-speed pseudo-ream),
The display means displays the display mode determined by the effect control means in accordance with the re-variable display executed during the first re-variable display time.

In the above configuration, when executing a pseudo-run, it is possible to execute a high-speed pseudo-run by combining, for example, 3.5 s and 7 s according to the determined number of executions. Therefore, according to the said structure, since the kind of production increases and it becomes possible to bring diversity to production, the interest of a player can be improved.
Further, for example, since the background color can change when the pseudo-ream is displayed during a short re-variable display time of 3.5 s, the interest for the high-speed pseudo-ream with a short re-variable display time is improved and the effect accompanied by the pseudo-ream is achieved. Can provide diversity.

(About Appendix M)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine having a different effect that is easily executed according to the effect mode being executed at that time is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

  However, in the technology as described above, even if the execution frequency of the effect is changed according to the effect mode, it is easy to estimate the execution frequency of the effect from the effect mode grasped by the player. There is a problem that it is limited and the interest in the production is reduced.

  This invention is made | formed in view of the said problem, and it aims at providing the game machine which can raise the interest with respect to an effect so that the interest with respect to an effect may not be reduced.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix M1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A lottery regarding a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a start prize), the identification information (for example, special symbol) is changed in accordance with the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is determined in advance. Main control means (for example, main CPU 71) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player in response to the special display mode (for example, jackpot symbol display mode). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling production according to the lottery result by the main control means,
As a gaming state controlled by the main control means after the end of the special gaming state, at least the number of established start conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations) may be a predetermined number (for example, the number of fluctuations of 100). A first gaming state that is a gaming state included in the termination condition (for example, non-probability and short-time gaming state), and a gaming state that has the same termination condition as the termination condition, and that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. A gaming state (for example, a promising and short-time gaming state), and
Of the plurality of tables associated with the variation pattern capable of specifying the variation time of the identification information, the number of times the predetermined start condition is established that the table used after the end of the special gaming state is satisfied after the end of the special gaming state In units, predefined according to the execution result of the special gaming state, and
Until the predetermined number of times, the table is defined so that the variation patterns selectable by the main control means are the same in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, In the number of times, at least when the special gaming state is not won, the table (for example, the gaming state) so that the variation time of the variation pattern selected by the main control means is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Another variation pattern selection table) is defined.

In the above configuration, the non-probable and short-time gaming state (“low time” and “low time”) and the probable and short-time game state (“high time” and “high time”) both have a variation count of, for example, 100 times. Then it ends by becoming non-temporary. Also, in these gaming states, the same variation pattern can be selected until the variation count reaches 100 times, but if the big hit is not won by the variation count 100 times (so-called loss), the variation count 100 In the second round, for example, a variation pattern of “00H05H” is selected in the case of non-probable and short-time gaming state, while a variation pattern of “00H06H” is selected in the case of probabilistic and short-time gaming state, and different variation patterns are obtained. Selected.
In this way, in the case of a loss at the end of each gaming state, since a different variation pattern is executed depending on the gaming state, the variation time varies depending on the variation pattern, so that control is performed until then. It is possible to indicate which gaming state is the gaming state by the variation time.
Therefore, according to the said structure, it becomes possible to improve a player's gameability, such as when the game state after a big hit ends differs, and to raise the interest with respect to a change time and an effect.

(Appendix M2)
In this game machine,
The first gaming state is a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state with a relatively low probability of transition to the special gaming state,
The second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state with a relatively high probability of transition to the special gaming state and a short-time gaming state,
The main control means ends the short-time gaming state when the predetermined number of times of establishment of the predetermined start condition reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific number of times that the predetermined number of start conditions is satisfied is greater than the predetermined number of times. The high-probability gaming state is terminated when (for example, the number of times of change is 124).

  In the above configuration, the high-probability gaming state continues after the end of the second gaming state. For example, in the case of losing at a change count of 100 times, it is possible to grasp which gaming state is based on the variation time of the identification information, and it is possible to grasp whether or not it is a high probability gaming state. It is possible to improve the playability of a person and to further enhance the interest in changing time and production.

(About others)
As a gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine is known (see, for example, JP 2013-13801 A). However, since this pachinko gaming machine does not have a configuration or function as a gaming machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve interest. This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, and it aims at providing the game machine which can aim at the improvement of interest.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 11 Speaker 13 Liquid crystal display device 13a Display area 23 Direction button 39 Displacement member 53 First big prize opening 54 Second big prize opening 54a Shutter 59A-59E, 59e-59h LED
71 Main CPU
201 Sub CPU
205 Display Control Circuit 206 Audio Control Circuit 207 LED Control Circuit 208 Drive Control Circuit 2000 Button Image 2010 Character

Claims (2)

A lottery related to a game is performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the identification information is changed in accordance with the lottery result, and the game is performed in response to the display result of the identification information being in a predetermined special display mode. A gaming machine with a main control means that can be controlled in a special gaming state advantageous to the
Production control means for controlling production according to the lottery result by the main control means,
As a gaming state controlled by the main control means after the end of the special gaming state, at least a first gaming state that is a gaming state included in the termination condition that the predetermined start condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times A gaming state having the same termination condition as the termination condition, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
Of the plurality of tables associated with the variation pattern capable of specifying the variation time of the identification information, the number of times the predetermined start condition is established that the table used after the end of the special gaming state is satisfied after the end of the special gaming state In units, predefined according to the execution result of the special gaming state, and
Until the predetermined number of times, the table is defined so that the variation patterns selectable by the main control means are the same in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, The number of times is defined such that the variation time of the variation pattern selected by the main control means differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state when at least the special gaming state is not won. A gaming machine characterized by that. The first gaming state is a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state with a relatively low probability of transition to the special gaming state,
The second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state with a relatively high probability of transition to the special gaming state and a short-time gaming state,
The main control means ends the short-time gaming state when the predetermined number of times of establishment of the predetermined start condition reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific number of times that the predetermined number of start conditions is satisfied is greater than the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the high probability gaming state is terminated when reaching.